+ All Categories
Home > Documents > DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Date post: 31-Dec-2015
Category:
Upload: joel-lee
View: 342 times
Download: 18 times
Share this document with a friend
358
96140E Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual
Transcript
Page 1: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

96140E

Read this manual before using the product in order toachieve maximum performance.Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit

DL-EP1User’s Manual

Page 2: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Introduction

This manual describes the basic operations and hardware functions of the DL-EP1. Read

the manual carefully to ensure safe performance and function of the DL-EP1.

Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

Ensure that the end user of this product receives this manual.

Symbols

The following symbols alert you to matters concerning the prevention of injury and

product damage.

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during opera-tion.

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

It indicates reference pages.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in

death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

in minor or moderate injury.

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product

damage as well as property damage.

Point

Important

CAUTION

DANGER

NOTICE

WARNING

Reference

Page 3: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Safety Information for DL-EP1

General Precautions

• Before and while operating this product, confirm its performance and functions

operate correctly.

• Implement sufficient safety measures to prevent human and property damage

in case this product fails.

• Be aware that the product functions and performance are not warranted if the product is

used outside the range of stated specifications or is modified by the customer.

• Combining this product with other equipment requires sufficient consideration

because the proper functions and performance may not be met depending on

the environment.

• Do not use this product for the purpose of protecting a human body or a part of

the human body.

• This product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use

this product in hazardous locations and/or in a potentially explosive atmo-

sphere.

• Do not expose equipment, including peripherals, to rapid temperature

changes. Equipment failure may result from condensation build up.

Precautions for Use

Equipment Environment

For safe, trouble-free operation of this product, the product must not be installed

• To avoid injury or failure, turn off the power immediately in the following cases.

- Water or foreign matter enters the main unit. - The case is broken, for example if it is dropped. - Smoke or unusual smell is emitted from the product.

• Use the correct power voltage. Failure to observe may result in injury, or failure.

• Do not disassemble or modify this product. Failure to observe may result in injury.

Do not turn off the power while you are setting any item.

Doing this may cause loss of data settings.

CAUTION

NOTICE

in the following environments:

• Humid, dusty, or poorly ventilated.

• Exposed to direct sunlight or heat source.

• Exposed to corrosive or flammable gases.

• Exposed directly to vibration or shock.

• Exposed to water, oil, or chemical splashes.

• Exposed to static electricity.

196140E

Page 4: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Noise Protection

If this product is installed in a location near an electrical noise source, e.g., a power

2

source or high-voltage line, it may malfunction or fail because of noise. Take protec-

tive measures, such as using a noise filter or running the cables separately.

About the Power Supply

• Noise superimposed on the power supply may result in malfunction. Use a stabi-

lized DC power supply configured with an isolation transformer.

• When using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the

frame ground terminal.

UL Certification

This product is an UL/C-UL Listed product.

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

• UL File No. E207185

• Category NRAQ, NRAQ7

Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as an UL/C-

UL Listed Product.

• Use this product under pollution degree 2.

• For wiring to the power supply connector, use a power supply with Class 2 output

defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electric Code).

• This product is an open type device. Therefore, it must be installed in an enclo-

sure with an IP 54 or higher rating. (e.g. Industrial control panel)

CE Marking

Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential

requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications.

Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in a member

state of European Union.

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

EMI : EN55011, Class A

EMS : EN61000-6-2

• Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable for connection to the network.

These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this prod-

uct incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The

manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-

product itself according to EMC Directive.

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

Page 5: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Relevant Manuals

The manuals relevant to this document are as follows:

PLC CPU unitEtherNet/IP scanner unit

DL-EP1 (this unit)

Manuals related to CPU unit

Manuals related to EtherNet/IP scanner unit

This manual

Manuals for each sensor amplifier unit

Example) • GT2-70 Series User’ s Manual • IG Series User’ s Manual • FD-MH Series Instruction Manual

KV-DN20

MSNS

ON

TERM.

Sensor amplifiers

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3

Page 6: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

4

MEMO

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

Page 7: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Manual Organization

Before Using1

Connection and Configuration2Communicating with the GT2 Series3

4

5

6

7

Communicating with the IB Series

Appendix9

Specifications8

Communicating with the FD-MH Series

Communicating with the IG Series

Communicating with the GT-70A Series

This chapter provides an overview of the DL-EP1 and describes its part names and functions.

This chapter describes the procedures from installing the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers to configuring communication.

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.

This chapter describes the specifications and external dimensions of the DL-EP1.

This chapter provides the parameter list, as well as troubleshooting instructions.

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 5

Page 8: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Table of Contents

Safety Information for DL-EP1 ..................................................................... 1

General Precautions ......................................................................... 1Precautions for Use ........................................................................... 1Precautions on Regulations and Standards ...................................... 2

Relevant Manuals .......................................................................................... 3

Manual Organization ..................................................................................... 5

Table of Contents .......................................................................................... 6

Terms Used in This Document ................................................................... 11

Chapter 1 Before Using

1-1 DL-EP1 Overview .............................................................................. 1-2Overview ........................................................................................ 1-2Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ...................................................... 1-2

1-2 Checking the Package Contents ..................................................... 1-3Package Contents .......................................................................... 1-3

1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part ................................................. 1-4

Chapter 2 Connection and Configuration

2-1 Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration .................................................................................... 2-2

Configuration Procedures .............................................................. 2-22-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers ......................... 2-3

Mounting and connection to Sensor Amplifiers .............................. 2-3Assigning ID Numbers ................................................................... 2-6

2-3 Wiring ............................................................................................... 2-10Connecting a communication cable ............................................. 2-10

2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1 ............................. 2-12DL-EP1 Settings ........................................................................... 2-12

2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner ............................ 2-15Setting the scanner ...................................................................... 2-15

Chapter 3 Communicating with the GT2 Series

3-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 3-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 3-2

3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 3-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 3-3

3-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 3-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 3-6

6 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

Page 9: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 3-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 3-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 3-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 3-15Communication Methods ............................................................. 3-17Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 3-20

3-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 3-21Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 3-22Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 3-22Objects and Services ................................................................... 3-25Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 3-27Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 3-28Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 3-30DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 3-31Using DL Object ........................................................................... 3-46

Chapter 4 Communicating with GT-70A Series

4-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 4-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 4-2

4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 4-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 4-3

4-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 4-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 4-6Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 4-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 4-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 4-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 4-15Communication Methods ............................................................. 4-17Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 4-20

4-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 4-21Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 4-22Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 4-22Objects and Services ................................................................... 4-25Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 4-27Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 4-28Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 4-30DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 4-31Using DL Object ........................................................................... 4-45

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7

Page 10: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Chapter 5 Communicating with IG Series

5-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 5-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 5-2

5-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 5-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 5-3

5-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 5-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 5-6Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 5-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 5-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 5-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 5-15Communication Methods ............................................................. 5-17Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 5-20

5-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 5-21Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 5-22Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 5-22Objects and Services ................................................................... 5-25Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 5-27Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 5-28Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 5-30DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 5-31Using DL Object ........................................................................... 5-52

Chapter 6 Communicating with IB Series

6-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 6-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 6-2

6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 6-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 6-3

6-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 6-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 6-6Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 6-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 6-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 6-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 6-16Communication Methods ............................................................. 6-18Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 6-21

6-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 6-22Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 6-23Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 6-23Objects and Services ................................................................... 6-26Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 6-28Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 6-29

8 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

Page 11: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 6-31DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 6-32Using DL Object ........................................................................... 6-53

Chapter 7 Communicating with FD-MH Series

7-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 7-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 7-2

7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 7-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 7-3

7-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 7-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 7-6Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 7-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 7-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 7-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 7-15Communication Methods ............................................................. 7-17Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 7-20

7-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 7-21Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 7-22Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 7-22Objects and Services ................................................................... 7-25Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 7-27Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 7-28Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 7-30DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 7-31Using DL Object ........................................................................... 7-44

Chapter 8 Specifications

8-1 Specifications .................................................................................... 8-28-2 Data Processing Time ...................................................................... 8-38-3 Dimensions ........................................................................................ 8-5

Chapter 9 Appendix

9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers ................................................ 9-2Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ...................................................... 9-2Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers .......................................... 9-3

9-2 Device Profile .................................................................................... 9-59-3 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 9-6

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9

Page 12: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

9-4 Default Settings ................................................................................. 9-89-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix

PLC ..................................................................................................... 9-9Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ................................................................................................ 9-9Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC .............................................................................................. 9-15

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ............................................................. 9-20List of Usable Objects .................................................................. 9-20Reading Each Object Table ......................................................... 9-21Identity Object (Class ID: 01H) ..................................................... 9-22Message Router Object (Class ID: 02H) ...................................... 9-25Assembly Object (Class ID: 04H) ................................................. 9-26Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06H) ............................... 9-28TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5H) ..................................... 9-30Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6H) ........................................... 9-34

9-7 Index ................................................................................................. 9-39

10 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

Page 13: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Terms Used in This Document

This document uses the following terms:

Term Description

Sensor A sensor amplifier

Scanner The EtherNet/IP scanner device

Adaptor The EtherNet/IP adaptor device

Main unitA sensor amplifier that has a power line and can operate

alone

Expansion unitA sensor amplifier that does not have a power line and

must be connected to a main unit

D-bus

The name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor

amplifiers

For example, the high-precision contact type digital sen-

sors of the GT2-70 series support this system.

PLC Programmable logic controller

Ladder program A program which controls the PLC

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 11

Page 14: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

1

MEMO

2 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

Page 15: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 1-1

1Before Using

This chapter provides an overview of the DL-EP1 and describes its

part names and functions.

1-1 DL-EP1 Overview ............................................... 1-2

1-2 Checking the Package Contents ........................ 1-3

1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part.................... 1-4

Page 16: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -1-2

1

Be

fore

Usin

g

1-1 DL-EP1 Overview

The DL-EP1 operates as an EtherNet/IP communication adaptor. EtherNet/IP

communications enable you to output the ON/OFF control signals and current values

of the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 as communication

data to a PLC or other equipment.

The DL-EP1 supports EtherNet/IP cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) and

message communication (Explicit messaging). Cyclic communication enables data

exchange without a ladder program. Message communication allows for reading/

writing sensor amplifier parameters and issuing commands to the sensor amplifiers.

System configuration example

You can connect a maximum of 15 sensor amplifiers supporting D-bus to the DL-

EP1. You can connect single main unit to the DL-EP1 and a maximum of 14

expansion units to the main unit. (D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving

system for sensor amplifiers.) If the sensor amplifier is D-bus compatible, different

models can be connected together.

How many and what types of sensor amplifiers can be connected depends on the

sensor amplifiers or units to be connected. For details, refer to "Connectable

Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2).

Overview

PLC or other host device(EtherNet/IP unit)

DL-EP1 (this unit)

EtherNet/IPadaptor

EtherNet

Connectable Sensor Amplifiers

Page 17: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 1-3

1

Be

fore

Usin

g

1-2 Checking the Package Contents

Before using the DL-EP1, make sure that the following equipment and accessories

are included in the package. We have thoroughly inspected the package contents

before shipment.

However, in the event of defective or broken items, contact your nearest KEYENCE

office.

Package contents

List of Optional Parts

Package Contents

DL-EP1 main unit x 1 Expansion connector

sticker x 1

End unit x 2

OP-26751

Instruction manual x 1

• STP (shielded twisted pair) cable

(Category 5e, straight)

- OP-51504 (0.2 m)

- OP-51505 (0.5 m)

- OP-51506 (1 m)

- OP-51507 (3 m)

- OP-51508 (5 m)

* The working ambient temperature of the above

cables are 0 to 50°C.

Page 18: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -1-4

1

Be

fore

Usin

g

1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part

This section describes the part names and functions of the DL-EP1.

(8) Sensor amplifier connector(for DIN rail mount type)

(1) RJ-45 connector(2) Reset switch (3) Link/activity indicator (green)(4) Module status indicator (green/red)

(5) Network status indicator (green/red)(6) Sensor communication indicator

(green/red)(7) MAC address

(9) Sensor amplifier connector (for panel mount type

and large display type)

Name Description

(1) RJ-45 connector Attach the network cable to this connector.

(2) Reset switch When held down for three seconds or longer, the DL-EP1

settings will be reset to the default settings.

For details, refer to "Default Settings" (Page 9-8).

(3) Link/activity

indicator

Normal: Green LED lights up or blinks

For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6).

(4) Module status

indicator

Normal: Green LED lights up

For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6).

(5) Network status

indicator

Normal: Green LED lights up

For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6).

(6) Sensor communication

indicator

Indicates the status of communication between the DL-

EP1 and sensor amplifiers.

Normal: Green LED lights up

For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6).

(7) MAC address MAC address for this DL-EP1

(8) Sensor amplifier

connector (for DIN rail

mount type)

Attach the sensor amplifier to this connector. When not

using this connector, remove it and replace with the

protective sticker.

Page 19: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part

1-5- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

1

Be

fore

Usin

g

(9) Sensor amplifier

connector (for panel

mount/large display

type)

Attach the sensor amplifier to this connector. A protective

seal is attached when shipped from the factory. The

optional expansion cable (OP-35361) is used for this

connection.

Name Description

Page 20: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

1

Be

fore

Usin

g

MEMO

1-6

Page 21: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 2-1

2Connection and Configuration

This section describes procedures from installing the DL-EP1 and

sensor amplifiers to configuring communication.

2-1 Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration ........................................................ 2-2

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers ........ 2-3

2-3 Wiring ............................................................... 2-10

2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1... 2-12

2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner.. 2-15

Page 22: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -2-2

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

2-1 Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration

This section describes the procedures before you use the DL-EP1.

The above configurations enable communication.

For the outline of scanner side configuration for communication with an Allen-Bradley

scanner, refer to "Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley

ControlLogix PLC" (Page 9-9).

Configuration Procedures

1. Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

Connecting the DL-EP1 to sensor amplifiers (Page 2-4)

Assigning ID Numbers (Page 2-6)

2. Wiring

3. Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1

4. Configuring Communication with the Scanner

Connecting a communication cable (Page 2-10)

Setting the IP address (Page 2-12)

Setting the IP address (Page 2-15)

Registering the device profile of the DL-EP1 (Page 2-15)

Configuring the Scanner Side

(Refer to each scanner manual.)

Page 23: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 2-3

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

This section describes how to mount the DE-EP1 on the DIN rail and to connect it to

sensor amplifiers.

You can connect a maximum of 15 sensor amplifiers supporting D-bus to the DL-

EP1. You can connect one main unit to the DL-EP1 and a maximum of 14 expansion

units to the main unit. (D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for

sensor amplifiers.) If the sensor amplifier is D-bus compatible, different models can

be connected together.

How many and what types of sensor amplifiers can be connected depends on the

sensor amplifiers or units to be connected. For details, refer to "Connectable

Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2).

Mounting the DL-EP1 on the DIN rail

1 Align the claw on the bottom of the DL-EP1 with the DIN rail. While pushing the amplifier in the direction of arrow (1), press down in the direction of arrow (2).

2 To remove the DL-EP1, raise the amplifier in the direction of arrow (3) while pushing the DL-EP1 in the direction of arrow (1).

Mounting and connection to Sensor Amplifiers

(3)

(2)(1)

Page 24: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

2-4

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

Connecting the DL-EP1 to sensor amplifiers

The EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 must be connected to sensor

amplifiers before it can function.The connecting procedure varies with the mounting type of the sensor amplifiers tobe connected.

For the instructions on connecting additional sensor amplifiers, refer to theinstruction manual of each sensor amplifier.

Connecting to sensor amplifiers of the DIN rail mount type

1 Remove the expansion protective cover from the sensor amplifier to be connected.

2 Mount the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, on the DIN rail and connect it to the sensor amplifier.Insert the EtherNet I/P Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifierconnector so as not to leave space between them.

Make sure that the sensor amplifiers are turned off before

connecting the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1.

Connecting the DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifiers when they are

turned on may damage the DE-EP1.

Make sure that the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail

mount type) is not askew on the side face of the EtherNet/IP

Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 according to the figure

shown below. Connecting the DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifier

with the connector being askew may damage the DL-EP1.

NOTICE

Point

Sensor amplifier

Expansion protective cover

Sensor amplifier EtherNet/IP Compatible Network UnitDL-EP1

Connector

NOTICE Sensor amplifier connector

EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1

Page 25: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

2-5

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

3 Mount the supplied end units (OP-26751: a set of two pieces) on the outer ends of the amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1. Then, fix the end units with the screws on the top of each end unit (2 points x 2 units). (Tightening torque : 0.6 N•m or less)Mount the end units in the same way as the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network

Unit DL-EP1.

Connecting to sensor amplifiers of panel mount type

1 Connect the sensor amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, with the optional expansion cable (OP-35361).

2 Remove the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mount type) from the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 using pliers. Then, attach the expansion connector sticker supplied with the DL-EP1.

Press the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, into

full engagement with the sensor amplifier. Energizing the DL-

EP1 when not inserted fully may damage the DE-EP1.

• Turn off the power supply and connect the expansion cable

securely. Energizing the DL-EP1 when not inserted fully

may damage the DL-EP1.

• Attaching or detaching the cable when the power supply is

on may damage the DL-EP1.

End unit

End unit

NOTICE

Peel off the protective sticker.

Expansion cable (Cable length: 300 mm)

NOTICE

Sensor amplifier connector(for DIN rail moun type) Expansion

connector sticker

Page 26: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

2-6

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

Connecting to sensor amplifiers of large display type

1 Connect the sensor amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 with the optional expansion cable (OP-35361).

2 Remove the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mounting type) from the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, using pliers. Then, attach the expansion connector sticker supplied with the DL-EP1.

Several sensor amplifiers can be connected to the DL-EP1. ID numbers for data

identification are assigned to each sensor amplifier.

The method for assigning ID numbers is as follows:

• "ID01" to "ID15" can be assigned as ID numbers (up to 15 sensor amplifiers can

be connected).

• ID numbers are assigned in order, starting from the sensor amplifier that is the

main unit. (Optional numbers cannot be assigned.)

• 0 is assigned as the ID number of the DL-EP1.

• Turn off the power supply and connect the expansion cable

securely. Energizing the DL-EP1 when not inserted fully

may damage the DL-EP1.

• Attaching or detaching the cable when the power supply is

on may damage the DL-EP1.

Expansion cable (Cable length: 300 mm)

Peel off theprotective sticker

Peel off the protective sticker

NOTICE

Sensor amplifier connector(for DIN rail mount type) Expansion

connector sticker

Assigning ID Numbers

Page 27: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

2-7

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

• You cannot change the ID numbers assigned to the sensor amplifiers.• In this manual, ID number 00 to ID number 15 are denoted as ID00 to

ID15, respectively.

Also for cyclic communication, output, current value, and external input are assigned

one by one per ID number. Data assignment depends on sensor amplifiers, so refer

to Chapter 3 to Chapter 8.

For DIN rail mount type

For panel mount type

Point

ID number 01

Mainunit

Expansionunit

Expansionunit

Expansionunit

02 08 09 00

ID number Sensor amplifier

01

02

08

09

Main unit

Expansion unit

Sensor amplifier

Expansion unit

Expansion unit

DL-EP1ID number 00

Page 28: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

2-8

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

For large display type (GT2-100N/100P)

ID01 ID02

ID03 ID04 ID05

ID06 ID07 ID08

ID09 ID10 ID11

DL-EP1ID number 00

: ID number 01 to11to

GT2-100N/100P

ID01 ID11

Headexpansionboard

Sensor amplifier

* The numbers are different from the ID numbers marked on the back of the GT2-100N/100P.

Page 29: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

2-9

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

ID numbers are assigned automatically, so changing the number of sensoramplifiers or their connection sequence may require control programmodification. In addition, some units are restricted in their connectionsequence (e.g., a unit that must be the first connection). For this reason,keep these in mind when creating a control program.• An "unassigned ID error" occurs if more sensor amplifiers are connected

than the maximum number of connectable amplifiers .

"Error code list" (Page 3-13)

"Connectable Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)• For the GT2-100 series, set the effective IDs correctly. Otherwise,

correct communication is not assured. For details on effective ID

settings, refer to the GT2-100 Series User's Manual.

When the DL-EP1 is used to communicate with the GT2-100 Series,

the ID numbers of the heads are ID01 for the main unit, ID02 for

expansion unit 1, ID03 for expansion unit 2, ..., and ID11 for

expansion unit 10.

Note that these numbers differ from the ID numbers described in the

GT2-100 Series Instruction Manual or User's Manual.

NOTICE

Point

Page 30: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -2-10

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

2-3 Wiring

The DL-EP1 uses the power supplied to sensor amplifiers, so there is no power cable

wiring. This section describes the wiring of communication cables used by the DL-

EP1.

Use the following procedures to connect the DL-EP1 to the communication cable

required for EtherNet/IP communication.

Usable cable

Usable cables depend on whether the system is configured with 10BASE-T or

100BASE-TX.

Structuring a 10BASE-T system

When the system is configured

with 10BASE-T, use a Category

3 or higher shielded twisted-

pair (STP) cable or an

unshielded twisted-pair (UTP)

cable.

Structuring a 100BASE-TX network

When the system (network) is configured with 100BASE-TX, use a Category 5 or

higher STP or UTP cable. Do not use a Category 3 or Category 4 UTP cable.

• Use a STP/UTP straight cable when connecting the DL-EP1 to anEthernet switch.

• Use a STP/UTP cross cable when directly connecting the DL-EP1 to aPC.

• Do not use the STP/UTP cross cable incorrectly because it is difficult todistinguish this cable from the STP/UTP straight cable in appearance.

• When the system (Ethernet) is configured with a type (e.g., 10BASE-2 or10BASE-5) other than 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, use an Ethernetswitch with an AUI (MAU) connector or a BNC connector or use a mediaconverter (10BASE5 → 10BASE-T or 10BASE2 → 10BASE-T).

Connecting a communication cable

STP/UTP cable

Point

Page 31: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-3 Wiring

2-11

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

DL-EP1 connector port

The DL-EP1 connector port accepts an RJ-45 8-pole modular connector (ISO8877

compliant) used with 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX and complies with the IEEE802.3

Standards.

Precautions for connecting a STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1 connector port

Take care not to apply a load to the DL-EP1 connector port when connecting the

STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1.

Connecting the DL-EP1 to EtherNet/IP

The following describes how to connect the DL-EP1 to the RJ-45 connector.

1 Turn off the power supply.

2 Connect one modular jack of the STP/UTP cable to the 10BASE-T/100BAS port of the Ethernet switch to be used.

Insert the modular jack until a "click" is heard. The modular jack and connector

will lock.

• Keep the length of the STP/UTP cable to be used 100 m or less.• Carefully check the state of connector (port) on the Ethernet

switch before connecting the DL-EP1. There are various Ethernetswitches. Some Ethernet switches have a different shapeconnector (AUI connector or BNC connector, etc.) from the RJ-45,while some have connectors used to connect Ethernet switchestogether (cascade ports).

3 Connect the modular jack on the other end of the STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1 connector port.

Insert the jack until a "click" is heard. The modular jack and connector will lock.

The cable may be bent and used when installed. Bending the cable

at a sharp angle may cut the wires in the cable or the cable may be

disconnected during use. Install or lay the cable to be used with

attention to the recommended bending radius R of the cable.

NOTICE

Point

Page 32: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -2-12

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1

This section describes settings for connecting the DL-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP system.

The following describes how to set communication with the DL-EP1.

Setting the IP address

Set the IP address with the DL-EP1 wired and with the power supplied.

By default, the IP address is not set. However, you can use the BOOTP client function

to set the IP address via Ethernet.

The following 2 methods are available for setting the IP address.

• Use the IP address setting tool (this tool can be downloaded from the Keyence

web site http://www.keyence.com).

Refer to the following setting procedures or the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual".

• Use an IP address setting tool from other sources.

Refer to the manuals provided by the respective sources.

Using the IP address setting tool

Here briefly describes the procedures for setting the IP address with the IP

address setting tool. For details on how to use the IP address setting tool, refer to

the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual". You can view the "IP Setting Tool User's

Manual" from [Help(H)] of "IP Setting Tool" as the PDF file.

1 Start the IP Setting Tool.Devices such as the DL-EP1 connected to the network and for which their IP

addresses are not set will appear.

To display the devices for which their IP addresses are not set, click the [Scan

EtherNet/IP devices (A)] button.

DL-EP1 Settings

Page 33: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1

2-13

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

To display "Not Set" for the IP address, the network status indicator(NS) must be off (IP address not assigned). To unassign the IPaddress, hold down the Reset switch on the DL-EP1 for threeseconds or longer.

2 Select the device for which to set the IP address and click [Setup IP addr.(I)] to display [Setup IP addr.].Compare the MAC address to be displayed with the front MAC address on the

DL-EP1 and select the device for which to set the IP address.

Set an IP address which is not currently used in "IP addr.(required)(I)" and click

the [OK] button.

Using the [Search available IP addresses (F)] button enables you to

search for open IP addresses.

Point

Reference

Page 34: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1

2-14

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

3 The IP address has now been set.

What is BOOTP?BOOTP is the abbreviation of BOOT strap Protocol. This protocol is used

by the client device in the TCP/IP network to make the network settings

assigned from the server.

If there is a BOOTP server in the same network as the device running as

the BOOTP client, an IP address is assigned to the device connected as

the BOOTP client.

Reference

IP address assignment

BOOTP client BOOTP server

Via Ethernet

Ethernet

Page 35: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 2-15

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner

This section describes scanner side configuration for connecting the DL-EP1 to the

EtherNet/IP system.

When communicating with an Allen-Bradley scanner, also refer to the

"Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC" (Page 9-9).

Connecting the DL-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP scanner requires the following settings:

Setting the IP address

Set the IP address of the scanner.

Registering the device profile of the DL-EP1

Register the device profile of the adaptor (DL-EP1) to be connected using the

scanner's setting software.

You can register the device profile manually or by reading the EDS (Electronic Data

Sheet) file. You can download the EDS file of the DL-EP1 from the Keyence web site

(http://www.keyence.com).

Configuring communication with the DL-EP1

The DL-EP1 uses EtherNet/IP cyclic communication or message communication to

communicate with the scanner.

Cyclic communication (Implicit messaging)

This function sends and receives data at a set RPI (Requested Packet Interval).

Selecting the communication method called "connection" and assigning the

devices to be sent and received on the scanner side enables the DL-EP1 to

communicate with the scanner without creating a ladder program.

Message communication (Explicit messaging)

This function is used to send and receive data which does not need to be timed.

Use this function when changing the sensor amplifier settings or when performing

EtherNet/IP communication with the scanner (e.g., Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series)

that does not support cyclic communication.

This function uses a ladder program to create a message on the scanner side for

communication.

For more information on setting each communication method, refer to the chapters

titling "Communicating with...." of each sensor amplifier as well as the manuals

enclosed with each scanner.

This manual explains only the EtherNet/IP scanner functions and settings

required for communication with the DL-EP1. For details on the functions

and settings between the EtherNet/IP scanner and CPU unit, refer to the

manuals enclosed with the scanner and CPU unit.

Setting the scanner

Reference

Page 36: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner

2-16

2

Co

nn

ec

tion

an

d C

on

figu

ratio

n

MEMO

Page 37: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3-1

3Communicating with

the GT2 Series

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that

communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit

and a communication timing chart.

3-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 3-2

3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 3-3

3-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 3-5

3-4 Message Communication................................. 3-21

Page 38: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -3-2

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

3-1 What is EtherNet/IP?

EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The

specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).

Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-

Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).

Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial

Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used

together with the network.

Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a

communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which

opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the

"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and

receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which

sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.

Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according

to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to

be adjusted for data exchange.

Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and

responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications

which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and

writing adaptor settings.

What is EtherNet/IP?

Scanner

Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor

High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)

Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)

Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)

Page 39: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3-3

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.

The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and

message EtherNet/IP communications.

The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

IN area

OUT area

Output

Current value

Error information

External input

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1

Sensor amplifier

Message communication

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

IN area

OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters

Cyclic communicationExternal input

Setting value

Cyclic communication

Overview of Communication Methods

Function of sensor amplifier

Communication Methods

Cyclic communication(Page 3-5)

Message Communication(Page 3-21)

Read status

Read output

Read current value

Execute external input

Change bank number

X

Rewrite setting value

Motion command

Read current value, setting,

and status

Read number of decimal

places

Rewrite setting value

Lock all

Page 40: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

3-4

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Cyclic communication

This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set

RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the

sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without

ladder programs.

Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.

Message communication

Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a

punctuality like cyclic communication.

In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be

exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific

to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.

PLC EtherNet/IP scanner

RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*

RPI=5 (ms)*

RPI=10 (ms)*

Various EtherNet/IP adaptors

Ethernet

* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.

Point

Page 41: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3-5

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

3-3 Cyclic communication

This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.

What is cyclic communication?

Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP devicein a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).

In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfullyopens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be

opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:

(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the

connection.(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not openthe connection.)

"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 3-20)

Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensoramplifier as follows:

To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not

support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use

"Message Communication" (Page 3-21).

(1) Request connection open

(3) Open connection

(2) Check compatibility

Output data

Data reflected in thescanner

Input data

The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

IN area

OUT area

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Reference

Page 42: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-6

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

(1) Set the connection to be used.

(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.

Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.

(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)

Cyclic communication can use the following functions:

(1) Read status

(2) Read output (Page 3-17)

Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, HH output, LL

output

(3) Read P.V. value (Page 3-19)

(4) Execute external input (Page 3-18)

Inputs that can be used: PRESET, TIMING, RESET, error clear

Configuring Cyclic Communication

Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication

Page 43: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-7

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic

communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type

usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.

The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:

• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection

type supports both point-to-point and multicast.

• The details of each application type are as follows:

Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data

transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data

transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is

made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)

data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the

settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be

opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).

Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1

to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only

monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an

"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-

EP1).

(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,

set the Connection Type to Multicast.

Usable Connections

NoConnection

NameInput/Output

Assembly Instance

Size(Byte)

RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)

Application Type

1

Monitor Data

And External

Input

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 ms

Exclusive

OwnerScanner to

DL-EP165H (101) 10

2Monitor Data

(Input Only)

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 msInput Only

Scanner to

DL-EP1FEH (254) 0

Reference

Page 44: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-8

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.

The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into

an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order

byte.

Example)

Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner IN area

Address 0Address 1

Address 167

Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Reference

16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41

16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43

12H 34H

56H 78H

High-order byte Low-order byte

High-order byte Low-order byte

56H43

78H42

12H41

34H40

32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51

12H51

34H50

56H49

78H48

12H 34H 56H 78H

Page 45: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-9

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H

This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.

For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 3-11).

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/

Current Value 1" (Page 3-12).

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Status

0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1

Error Status

1 Error StatusWarningStatus

Reserved for system

SensorError

Status

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

SensorWarningStatus

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0

OverRange

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0UnderRange

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0Invalid

10 ID08 . . . . . ID01

11Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1

OverRange

12 ID08 . . . . . ID01

13Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1UnderRange

14 ID08 . . . . . ID01

15Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1Invalid

16 ID08 . . . . . ID01

17Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 1 (HIGH)

18 ID08 . . . . . ID01

19Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 2 (LOW)

20 ID08 . . . . . ID01

21Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 3 (GO)

22 ID08 . . . . . ID01

23Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 4 (HH)

24 ID08 . . . . . ID01

25Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 5 (LL)

26 ID08 . . . . . ID01

27Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 46: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-10

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

External Input

Response 1(Preset)

28 ID08 . . . . . ID01

29Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 2(Timing)

30 ID08 . . . . . ID01

31Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 3(Preset)

32 ID08 . . . . . ID01

33Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 4(ErrorClear)

34 ID08 . . . . . ID01

35Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 5(Unassigned)

36 ID08 . . . . . ID01

37Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

ErrorID Number

40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

41

ErrorCode

42Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

43

WarningID Number

44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

45

Warning Code

46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

47

Current Value 0

(Comparator Value (P.V.)

or Raw Value (R.V.))

48

ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49

50

51

: :

104

ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105

106

107

Current Value 1

(Unassigned)

108

ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109

110

111

: :

164

ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165

166

167

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Page 47: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-11

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Parameter List

Item Description

DL-EP1 Error

Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.

ON: An error occurred.

OFF: No error occurred.

Warning Status (Unassigned)

Error Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor

amplifiers are output.

When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0

is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".

ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor

amplifiers.

OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.

Sensor Error Status

The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is

output.

ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

Sensor Warning

Status(Unassigned)

Current Value n

Over Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is greater than the measurement upper limit.

OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is less than the measurement upper limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.)

Current Value n

Under Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less

than the measurement lower limit.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

greater than the measurement lower limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.)

Current Value n

Invalid

(n: 0 to 1)

The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

invalid.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

valid (normal).

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.)

Output n (n: 1 to 5)

The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target

ID number is output.

Output 1: HIGH output

Output 2: LOW output

Output 3: GO output

Output 4: HH output*1

Output 5: LL output*1

ON: Output n is output.

OFF: Output n is not output.

External Input

Response

n (n: 1 to 5)

An external input response is output when the corresponding external input

request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.

The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.

ON: The external input request was made (ON).

OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).

For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 3-18).

Page 48: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-12

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

*1 There is no assigned output in GT2-71MC*.

Current Value 0/Current Value 1

Error ID Number

If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and

the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID

number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs

in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest

priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

Error Code

If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is

stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor

amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

"Error code list" (Page 3-13)

Warning ID

Number(Unassigned)

Warning Code (Unassigned)

Current Value n

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value

0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the

current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value

1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0

to 1) depend on the use conditions.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.)

"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 3-12)

Item Description

Name Model Conditions Function

Current Value 0Main unit/

expansion unit

When calculation mode is

OFFComparator value (P.V.)

When calculation mode is

ON (standard difference)Comparator value (P.V.)

When calculation mode is

ON (other than standard

difference)

Raw value (R.V.)

When calculation-only mode

is usedComparator value (P.V.)

Current Value 1Main unit/

expansion unit- (Unassigned)

Page 49: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-13

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Error code list

The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.

DL-EP1

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

0

0 No error - -

51Unassigned ID

error

The main unit assigned no ID

within 10 seconds after the

DL-EP1 had been started.

• Check if the number of

connected sensor

amplifiers exceeds the

maximum number of

sensor amplifiers that can

be connected to the main

unit.

"Connectable Sensor

Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)

• Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on

again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

52Start-time

communication error

Communication between

sensor amplifiers ended

abnormally before ID

assignment completion.

Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

53

Unsupported

sensor amplifier

connection error

A sensor amplifier not

supported by the DL-EP1 is

connected.

Check the model of the

connected sensor amplifier

and remove the sensor

amplifier if it is not supported

by the DL-EP1.

54 Mixed model error

Sensor amplifiers outside the

specifications have a mixed

connection.

Check if the models are

mixable.

"Mixed Connection of

Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)

55Start-time

communication error

ID number assignment is

successful but

communication failed during

the subsequent initial

communication.

Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

56Current limitation

error

The number of connected

sensor amplifiers exceeds

the allowable range.

Use sensor amplifiers within

the allowable range.

57

Communication

error between

sensor amplifiers

An error occurred during

communication between

sensor amplifiers.

Check if there is a noise

source around the DL-EP1.

If the sensor communication

indicator is flashing red, turn

the power on again.

70IP address

duplicate error

The IP address is the same

as another device.

Check the IP address

setting.

Page 50: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-14

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

GT2 Series

Warning code list

No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the GT2 Series sensor amplifiers

connected to the DL-EP1.

0

100 System error The IP address is incorrect.

Contact your nearest

KEYENCE office.

101 System errorA default gateway setting

error occurred.

102 System error

An attempt to read data in

EEPROM such as the MAC

address has failed.

103 System errorAn attempt to start the

protocol stack has failed.

104 System errorAn attempt to access

FlashROM has failed.

150 System errorThe number of held IDs is

incorrect.

151 System errorThe number of sensors is

incorrect.

152 System error An initial read error occurred.

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

01H to

0FH

(Each

ID

number)

01H

Sensor amplifier

error 1 of each ID

number

Overcurrent error (ErC)

Refer to the GT2 Series

User's Manual.

02H

Sensor amplifier

error 2 of each ID

number

Head error (ErH)

03H

Sensor amplifier

error 3 of each ID

number

EEPROM error (ErE)

04H

Sensor amplifier

error 4 of each ID

numbe

Jam check error

(Er.ChK)

05H

Sensor amplifier

error 5 of each ID

number

Self-timing

delay error

(Er.dLY)

06H

Sensor amplifier

error 6 of each ID

number

Number-of-units error

(Er.Unit)

07H

Sensor amplifier

error 7 of each ID

number

Calculation error(Er.CAL)

08H

Sensor amplifier

error 8 of each ID

number

Calculation-only mode error

(Er.noH)

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

Page 51: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-15

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP

scanner.

External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H

Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner's OUT area

Address 0Address 1

Address 9

External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

External

Input

Request 1

(Preset)

0 ID08 . . . . . ID01

1Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 2

(Timing)

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 3

(Reset)

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 4

(Error Clear)

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 5

(Unassigned)

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 52: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-16

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Parameter List

Name Function Operation

External

Input

Request 1

Preset

ON: Executes preset. Executing preset turns on external input

response 1.

OFF: Turns off external input response 1.

External

Input

Request 2

Timing

execution

ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input

response 2.

OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input

response 2.

External

Input

Request 3

Reset Request

ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input

response 3.

OFF: Turns off external input response 3.

External

Input

Request 4

Error clear

ON: Executes error clear. Executing error clear turns on external

input response 4.

OFF: Turns off external input response 4.

External

Input

Request 5

(Unassigned) (Unassigned)

Page 53: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-17

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1

(cyclic communication).

"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-17)

"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-18)

"Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 3-19)

For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"

(Page 3-4).

Reading an output from a sensor amplifier

Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, HH, and LL

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 3-9)

This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic

communication.

To use the HH output and LL output, set "Special Output Setting" of thesensor amplifier to "5-Output".

Communication Methods

PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0

Sensor amplifier (1)Output

HIGH output of ID 01

10

ONOFF

Point

Page 54: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-18

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier

Available external inputs: PRESET, TIMING, RESET, error clear

Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance

(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 3-15)

This example shows how to enter a TIMING input to the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was

assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor

amplifier is turned on or off.

(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input

response.

• To use the TIMING input, set "Simultaneous Input Setting" of the sensor amplifier to "Individual Input".

• To use the TIMING input, set the "Timing Type" of the sensor amplifier to"External Timing Input".

After the external input is executed, the button operation of the sensor

amplifiers is locked for about 10 seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is

displayed for about 2 seconds during switching to the locked state or

when an attempt is made to operate a locked button. When button

operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock ( )" is displayed for about 2

seconds. However, the initialization screen appears when an initialization

reset is executed. If an external input is repeatedly executed when the

initialization screen is being displayed, the initialization screen is retained.

PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [2]Bit0

(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0

Sensor amplifierExternal InputExternal input 2 to ID 01

10

ONOFF

10

Point

Reference

Page 55: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-19

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers

Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of

each sensor amplifier is assigned.

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 3-9)

This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers

ID01, ID02, and ID03.

(1)When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator

value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.

If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -199.9999 to 199.9999.

If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is

retained without updating the current value.

(2)The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of

IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current

Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a

sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID

number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1.

*For the GT2 Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.

PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]

Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

IN area [48 to 51]

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

IN area [52 to 55]

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

IN area [56 to 59]

Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

(1)

Page 56: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-3 Cyclic communication

3-20

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the

DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1

to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a

connection is opened.

When using scanners of other manufacturers

For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each

scanner.

Checking the Device Compatibility

Page 57: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3-21

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

3-4 Message Communication

This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.

What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?

Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing

commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each

EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not

require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor

settings.

The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication

include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the

device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,

to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.

The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined

UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.

Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

Send

Receive

Receive

Send

(1) Message communication command

(3) Message communication response

(2) Interpret and execute command

Reference

Page 58: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-22

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and

send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"

(Page 3-25)

Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable

commands.

The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication

when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-46)

Configuring Message Communication

Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication

Command

Response:123456

GT2-7∗ Comparator values (P. V. values): 123456

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)

GT2-7∗

Page 59: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-23

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-47)

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DL-

EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-48)

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1.

* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank.

"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 3-49)

Command:6000

Response

GT2-7∗ jam detection position: 5000→6000

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0399H(921)Service data: 6000

GT2-7∗

Command

Response

Preset execution by GT2-7∗

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0301H(769)

GT2-7∗

Command

Response

Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H

GT2-7*

Page 60: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-24

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read

from the sensor amplifier.

"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier" (Page 3-51)

For the GT2 Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as

follows:

Data: 125300

Number of decimal places: 4

Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.

If message communication writes data to a sensor amplifier, issues anoperation command to the sensor amplifier, or locks sensor amplifieroperations, the sensor amplifier button operations are locked for about 10

seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds duringswitching to the locked state or when an attempt is made to operate alocked button. When button operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock

( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds.

Command

Response

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)

Reads the number of decimal places of the GT2-7∗ comparator value (P.V. value).

Reference

125300 12.5300 12.53mmNumber of decimal places 4 3 2 1

Point

Page 61: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-25

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.

Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter

change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal

places (5), etc.

Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor

amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the

comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it

possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers

corresponding to the respective instances.

Objects and Services

Parameter change(3)

Operation command execution(4)

Read of the number of decimal places(5)

DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1

Object(1)

(2)

Service

Data output

ID: 0324H Output

Attribute

ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate)

ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value)

DL Object(Class ID: 67H)

DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H

ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H

ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H

:

:

Page 62: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-26

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to

express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects

abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a

group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same

type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a

class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each

uses a unique attribute value.

• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.

The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A

command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance

ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the

command also requires a setting (service data).

* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.

"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"

(Page 3-28)

Reference

Command Response

・Service

・Class ID

・Instance ID

・Attribute ID*

・Service data*

・General Status

・Additional Status*

・Service response data*

Page 63: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-27

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.

Objects Usable by DL-EP1

Command

Response

DLObject

MessageRouterObject

ConnectionManagerObject

AssemblyObject

IdentityObject

TCP/IPInterfaceObject

EthernetLink

Object

EtherNet/IP unit

Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage

DL Object 67H

This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and

the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and

writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to

the DL-EP1.

3-31

Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,

general information and a reset service, etc.9-22

Message Router

Object02H

This object provides connection points for message

communication.9-25

Assembly Object 04H

This object provides access to the devices via cyclic

communication. This object can be used to send data

to the devices that do not support cyclic

communication.

9-26

Connection

Manager Object06H

This object is used for connection-type

communication.9-28

TCP/IP Interface

ObjectF5H

This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/

IP network interface. You can set an IP address,

subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.

9-30

Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34

Page 64: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-28

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for

communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of

Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to

the scanner.

Commands

• Command format

*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-

31) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).

Responses

• Response format

Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication

Item Description

Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).

Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Item Description

General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H

is returned when the command ends normally.

Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).

Service response

data

Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the

command.

Page 65: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-29

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Command processing order and error response

Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:

Supplement for object processing

• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service

data.

• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is

executed, ignoring Attribute ID.

• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),

"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.

• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size

is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is

returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is

executed, ignoring the excessive data.

Class ID check

Yes

No

Instance ID check

Yes

No

Service check

Yes

No

Attribute ID check

Executes supported service process

Yes

No

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status

Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status

Page 66: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-30

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Reading the attribute ID

Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID

Data Type

The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:

Reading the DL Object Table

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Instance ID

Attribute ID

Name Description Attribute Data Type

00H74H

(116)

Output

1

Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each

sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is set to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Item Description

(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.

(2) Attribute ID Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.

(3) Name Represents the attribute name.

(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of

parameters that can be set.

(5) Attribute

Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.

R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,

Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.

W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used

to write the attribute value.

(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.

Data Type DescriptionRange

Minimum Maximum

INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767

UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535

DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647

WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -

DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -

STRING

Character string

(2-byte length information +

1-byte array per character)

- -

Page 67: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-31

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This

object is unique to the DL-EP1.

Services

*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH)

connected to the DL-EP1.*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID

90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.

DL Object (Class ID:67H)

Service Code

Service Name Description

0EHParameter

read

Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"

(Page 3-46).

10HParameter

write

Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 3-47).

4BH*1 Operation

command

Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of

processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.

Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the

object.

refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service

4BH (operation command)" (Page 3-48). For examples of

using this service, refer to

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 3-48).

4CHBatch lock

setting*2

Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected

sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported

by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor

amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code

09H is returned as a response.

Setting 0: Not lock

Setting 1: Full key lock

Setting 2: Key lock

"Lock setting" (Page 3-32)

For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking

sensor amplifier operations" (Page 3-49).

* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch

the bank.

4DH

Acquisition of the

number of decimal

places *3

Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated

parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)

Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from

a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-51).

Page 68: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-32

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

• Lock setting

Responses

The responses made when each service is used are as follows:

(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH

(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H

(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH

(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH

(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH

Setting Description

0 Does not execute lock.

1Executes full key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen

display switching).

2Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display

switching and [RESET] button).

GeneralStatus

Command TypeDescription

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

00H Normal end

05H The instance ID is out of range.

08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or

cannot be executed.

09H - - - - The written data is out of range.

0CH - - -

• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled

by cyclic communication.

• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.

Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation

command.

0EH - - - -

• An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that

cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the

unwritable status.

• The written data is out of range.

10H - - - -

An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that

cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the

unreadable status.

13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.

The defined data size is stored in the additional status.

14H - The attribute ID is out of range.

16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated

instance ID is not connected.

1FH

• This service is supported by the designated instance ID

but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.

(Additional status: C350H)

• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be

written into the parameter.

(Additional status: C351H)

• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional

status: C352H)

FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Page 69: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-33

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Attributes

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

00H

64H

(100)Status

Indicates the status of this unit and connected

sensor amplifier.

Bit 0: DL-EP1 Error Status

Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system

Bit14: Warning Status

Bit15: Error Status

R WORD

65H

(101)

Sensor Error

Status

Indicates the error status of the connected

senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the

corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned

to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

66H

(102)

Warning

Status(Unassigned) R WORD

67H

(103)Reserved for system

68H

(104)

Current

Value 0

Property

Indicates the status of current value 0 of each

amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",

“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit

corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

69H

(105)

Current

Value 1

Property

Indicates the status of current value 1 of each

amplifier. If the current value 1 is "0ver Range",

"Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit

corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

6AH

(106) to

6BH

(107)

Reserved for system

6CH

(108)

Error ID

Number

Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.

Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0)R UINT

6DH

(109)Error Code

Indicates the error code that is happening.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

6EH

(110)

Warning ID

Number(Unassigned) R UINT

6FH

(111)

Warning

Code(Unassigned) R UINT

Page 70: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-34

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

00H

70H

(112) to

73H

(115)

Reserved for system

74H

(116)

Output1

(HIGH)

Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of

each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

75H

(117)

Output2

(LOW)

Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of

each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

76H

(118)

Output3

(GO)

Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each

amplifier. When GO is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

77H

(119)Output4*1

(HH)

Indicates the status of HH output (output 4) *1 of

each amplifier. When HH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

78H

(120)Output5*1

(LL)

Indicates the status of LL output (output 5) *1 of

each amplifier. When LL is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

79H

(121) to

89H

(137)

Reserved for system

8AH

(138)

Current

Value 0

Invalid

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8BH

(139)

Current

Value 0

Under Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less

than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit

of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 71: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-35

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

00H

8CH

(140)

Current

Value 0

Over Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

higher than the upper limit of the detection range,

the bit of corresponding ID number is turned

ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8DH

(141)

Current

Value 1

Invalid

When the current value 1 of each amplifier is

invalid, the bit of the corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8EH

(142)

Current

Value 1

Under Range

When the current value 1 of each amplifier is less

than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit

of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8FH

(143)

Current

Value 1 Over

Range

When the current value 1 of each amplifier is

higher than the upper limit of the detection

range, the bit of the corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15

Bit15: Reserved for system

R WORD

90H

(144)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 1)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 1.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

91H

(145)

to 9DH

(157)

:

9EH

(158)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 15)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor ID

number 15.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

9FH

(159)Reserved for system

A0H

(160)

Current

Value 1 (ID

Number 1)

Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID

number 1.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

A1H

(161) to

ADH

(173)

:

AEH

(174)

Current

Value 1 (ID

Number 15)

Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID

number 15.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

AFH

(175)Reserved for system

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 72: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-36

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

*1 If the sensor amplifier is GT2-71MC*, there is no assigned output.

*2 This attribute cannot be used in the GT2-100 Series. The initial value of the

effective ID is read irrespective of the effective ID setting.

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current

Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 3-12).

00H

B0H

(176)

Sensor

Status Mask

Setting

Set up the condition to determine if the sensor

error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error

(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS

LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or

warning occurs.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Not mask

1: Mask

R/W UINT

B1H

(177)

Sensor

Connected

Number*2

Indicates the number of connected sensor

amplifiers.

Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0)

R UINT

B2H

(178) to

C7H

(199)

Reserved for system

0300H

(768)

Error Code

(ID number

00)

Indicates the error code of ID number 0.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

0301H

(769) to

030EH

(782)

:

030FH

(783)

Error Code

(ID number

15)

Indicates the error code of ID number 15.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

0310H

(784) to

04FFH

(1279)

Reserved for system

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Reference

Page 73: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-37

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Attributes for GT2 Series (Common to all GT2 Series)

Designate the ID number (01H to 0FH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Group1

0320H

(800)

Group1

Entry count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can

be set in Group 1.

Parameter range: 9

R DINT

0321H

(801)

Sensor

amplifier

error state

Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier.

bit0: Overcurrent error (ErC)

bit1: Head error (ErH)

bit2: EEPROM error (ErE)

bit3: Jam check error (Er.chK)

bit4: Self-timing delay (Er.dLY)

bit5: Number-of-units error (Er.Unit)

bit6: Calculation error(Er.CAL)

bit7: Calculation-only mode error (Er.noH)

R DWORD

0322H

(802) to

0323H

(803)

Reserved for system

0324H

(804)

Control

output

Indicates the control output status.

Parameter range: 00H to 1FH (initial value: 00H)

bit0: HIGH output

bit1: LOW output

bit2: GO output

bit3: HH output*1

bit4: LL output*1

R DWORD

0325H

(805)

Comparator

value (P.V.

Value)*2, *3, *4

Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value).

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R DINT

0326H

(806)

Raw value

(R.V. Value)*2, *4, *5

Indicates the raw value (R.V. value).

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R DINT

0327H

(807)

Peak value

during

sampling *2 , *3, *4, *6

Indicates the peak-hold value in peak-to-peak

mode.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R DINT

0328H

(808)

Bottom value

during

sampling*2, *3, *4, *6

Indicates the bottom-hold value in peak-to-peak

mode.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R DINT

0329H

(809)

Calculation

display

value*2, *4, *7

Indicates the calculation display value.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R DINT

Page 74: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-38

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Group2

032AH

(810) to

033FH

(831)

Reserved for system

0340H

(832)

Group2 Entry

count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be

set in Group 2.

Parameter range: 20

R DINT

0341H

(833)

Bank 0 HIGH

setting

Indicates the bank 0 HIGH setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000)

R/W DINT

0342H

(834)

Bank 0 LOW

setting

Indicates the bank 0 LOW setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)

R/W DINT

0343H

(835)

Bank 0

preset value

Indicates the bank 0 preset value.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R/W DINT

0344H

(836)

Bank 0 HH

setting*1

Indicates the bank 0 HH setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000)

R/W DINT

0345H

(837)

Bank 0 LL

setting*1

Indicates the bank 0 LL setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)

R/W DINT

0346H

(838)

Bank 1 HIGH

setting

Indicates the bank 1 HIGH setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000)

R/W DINT

0347H

(839)

Bank 1 LOW

setting

Indicates the bank 1 LOW setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)

R/W DINT

0348H

(840)

Bank 1

preset value

Indicates the bank 1 preset value.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R/W DINT

0349H

(841)

Bank 1 HH

setting*1

Indicates the bank 1 HH setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000)

R/W DINT

034AH

(842)

Bank 1 LL

setting*1

Indicates the bank 1 LL setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)

R/W DINT

034BH

(843)

Bank 2 HIGH

setting

Indicates the bank 2 HIGH setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000)

R/W DINT

034CH

(844)

Bank 2 LOW

setting

Indicates the bank 2 LOW setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)

R/W DINT

034DH

(845)

Bank 2

preset value

Indicates the bank 2 preset value.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 75: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-39

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Group2

034EH

(846)

Bank 2 HH

setting*1

Indicates the bank 2 HH setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000)

R/W DINT

034FH

(847)

Bank 2 LL

setting*1

Indicates the bank 2 LL setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)

R/W DINT

0350H

(848)

Bank 3 HIGH

setting

Indicates the bank 3 HIGH setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000)

R/W DINT

0351H

(849)

Bank 3 LOW

setting

Indicates the bank 3 LOW setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)

R/W DINT

0352H

(850)

Bank 3

preset value

Indicates the bank 3 preset value.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R/W DINT

0353H

(851)

Bank 3 HH

setting*1

Indicates the bank 3 HH setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000)

R/W DINT

0354H

(852)

Bank 3 LL

setting*1

Indicates the bank 3 LL setting.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)

R/W DINT

0355H

(853) to

035FH

(863)

Reserved for system

Group3

0360H

(864)

Group3 Entry

count

Indicates the number of items

(number of entries) that can be set in Group 3.

Parameter range: 7

R DINT

0361H

(865) Key lock*8

Sets key lock. "Lock setting" (Page 3-32)

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: Unlock

1: Full key lock

2: Key lock

R/W DINT

0362H

(866)

Bank

switching

State*9

Indicates the bank switching.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)R/W DINT

0363H

(867)

Timing

status*10

Indicates the timing status.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

For R (read)

0: The timing input is OFF or measurement is in

progress in self-timing mode.

1: The timing input is ON or measurement is

not in progress in self-timing mode.

For W (write)

0: Change was made during measurement.

1: Change was made during non-

measurement.

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 76: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-40

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Group3

0364H

(868) to

0366H

(870)

Reserved for system

0367H

(871)

Bar display

mode*11

Indicates bar display mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Bar display mode *11

1: OK/NG display mode

R/W DINT

0368H

(872) to

037FH

(895)

Reserved for system

Group4

0380H

(896)

Group4 Entry

count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can

be set in Group 4.

Parameter range: 29

R DINT

0381H

(897)

Calculation

mode and

Setting*12, *19

Indicates calculation mode/calculation setting.

Parameter range: 0 to 27 (initial value: 0)

Tenth place (calculation mode)

0: Does not use the calculation function.

1: Uses the calculation function.

2: Calculation-only mode

Unit digit (calculation setting)

0: Maximum value

1: Minimum value

2: Flatness

3: Average

4: Reference difference

5: Twist

6: Warpage

7: Thickness

(If the calculation function is not used, the

values written into the calculation setting are

invalid.)

R/W DINT

0382H

(898)

Detection

mode

Indicates detection mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: Standard

1: NG hold

2: Peak hold

3: Bottom hold

4: Peak-to-peak

R/W DINT

0383H

(899)

Hold update

method

Indicates the hold update method.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Timing

1: Regular update

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 77: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-41

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Group4

0384H

(900)

Response

time*13

Indicates the response time.

Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 3)

0: hSP (3.0)

1: 5 ms

2: 10 ms

3: 100 ms

4: 500 ms

5: 1000 ms

R/W DINT

0385H

(901)

Timing

type*14

Indicates the timing type.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: External timing input

1: Rising edge self-timing

2: Falling edge self-timing

R/W DINT

0386H

(902)

Self-timing

level

Indicates the self timing level.

Parameter range: 199.9999

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)

R/W DINT

0387H

(903)

Self-timing

delay type

Indicates the self-timing delay type.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Static hold

1: Delay timer

R/W DINT

0388H

(904)

User-

specified

delay time

Indicates the user-specified delay time.

Parameter range: 0 to 9999

(initial value: 1000)

R/W DINT

0389H

(905)

Static hold

determination

Indicates the static hold delay stable

determination.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Default

1: User

R/W DINT

038AH

(906)

Static hold

stable range

Indicates the static hold delay stable range.

Parameter range: 0.0000 to 199.9999

(initial value: 0.0100)

R/W DINT

038BH

(907)

Measurement

direction

Indicates the measurement increase/decrease

direction.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Normal

1: Reversed

R/W DINT

038CH

(908)Multiplier

Indicates the multiplier.

Parameter range: 0.1 to 100.0

(Initial value: 1.0)

R/W DINT

038DH

(909)Output mode

Indicates output mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: N.O.

1: N.C.

R/W DINT

038EH

(910)

Display

resolution

Indicates the display resolution.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)

0: 0.0001

1: 0.001

2: 0.01

3: ___0.1

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 78: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-42

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Group4

038FH

(911)Hysteresis

Indicates the hysteresis.

Parameter range: 0.0000 to 199.9999

(Initial value: 0.0030)

R/W DINT

0390H

(912)

Simultaneous

input

setting*12

Indicates the simultaneous input setting.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Individual input

1: Simultaneous input

R/W DINT

0391H

(913)

Special output

setting*1, *15

Indicates the special output setting.

Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0)

0: Not used

1: 5-output

2: Limit output

3: Limit output user setting

4: All GO

5: All limit output

R/W DINT

0392H

(914)

Limit output

HH position*1

Indicates the limit output HH position.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)

R/W DINT

0393H

(915)

Limit output

LL position*1

Indicates the limit output LL position.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)

R/W DINT

0394H

(916)

Select preset

data

Indicates the select preset data.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: R.V. value

1: P.V. value

R/W DINT

0395H

(917)

Preset

memory

Indicates the preset memory.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: YES

1: NO

R/W DINT

0396H

(918)Preset point

Indicates the preset point.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Common to all banks

1: Save for each bank

R/W DINT

0397H

(919)

Power-saving

function

(ECO)

Indicates the power-saving function (ECO).

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: HALF

2: ALL

R/W DINT

0398H

(920)

Jam

detection

function

Indicates the jam detection function.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: ON

2: USER

R/W DINT

0399H

(921)

Jam

detection

position

Indicates the jam detection position.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 79: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-43

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Group4

039AH

(922)

Batch

setting*16

Indicates the batch setting.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Individual

1: Batch

R/W DINT

039BH

(923)

Analog

Range

setting*17

Indicates the analog range setting.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Default

1: Free range setting

R/W DINT

039CH

(924)

Free range

setting

(Hi)*17

Indicates the free range setting (Hi).

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 12.0000)

R/W DINT

039DH

(925)

Free range

setting

(Lo)*17

Indicates the free range setting (Lo).

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R/W DINT

039EH

(926) to

039FH

(927)

Reserved for system

Group5

03A0H

(928)

Group5

Entry count

Indicates the number of items

(number of entries) that can be set in Group 5.

Parameter range: 15

R DINT

03A1H

(929)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID1*4, *18

Indicates the R.V. value of main unit (ID number

1) on which the calculation result was based.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R DINT

03A2H

(930) to

03AEH

(942)

:

03AFH

(943)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID15*4, *18

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 15) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R DINT

03B0H

(944) to

03BFH

(959)

Reserved for system

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 80: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-44

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

*1 When GT2-71MC* is used, these cannot be read and written.

*2 Use these in combination with the comparator value property (Current Value n

Over Range, Current Value n Under Range, Current Value n Invalid).

*3 If the calculation function is used and the calculation setting is other than

standard difference display, a read error occurs in the expansion unit.

*4 If this value is Current Value Over Range, 999.9999 is stored.

If this value is Current Value Under Range, -999.9999 is stored.

If this value is Current Value Invalid, -999.9998 is stored.

If this value is Error, 1000.0000 is stored.

*5 For calculation-only mode, a read error occurs in the main unit.

Group6

03C0H

(960)

Group6

Entry count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can

be set in Group 6.

Parameter range: 11

R DINT

03C1H

(961)Product code

Indicates the product code.

Parameter range:

GT2-7*(main unit) : 4006

GT2-7*(expansion unit) : 4007

GT2-71MC* : 4008

GT2-100*(main unit) : 4010

GT2-100*(expansion unit) : 4011

R DINT

03C2H

(962)Revision

Indicates the revision.

Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFHR DINT

03C3H

(963) to

03C7H

(967)

Reserved for system

03C8H

(968)

Product

name

Indicates the product name.

Parameter range:

GT2-7*(main unit) : "GT2-71*/75*"

GT2-7*(expansion unit) : "GT2-72*/76*"

GT2-71MC* : "GT2-71MC*"

GT2-100*(main unit) : "GT2-100*"

GT2-100*(expansion unit) : "GT2-100*"

R STRING

03C9H

(969) to

03D6H

(982)

Reserved for system

03D7H

(983)Series code

Indicates the series code.

Parameter range:

GT2-7*(main unit) : 4006

GT2-7*(expansion unit) : 4007

GT2-71MC* : 4008

GT2-100*(main unit) : 4010

GT2-100*(expansion unit) : 4011

R DINT

03D8H

(984)Series version

Indicates the series version.

Parameter range: 1R DINT

03D9H

(985)Device type

Indicates the device type.

Parameter range: 0R DINT

03DAH

(986) to

03DFH

(991)

Reserved for system

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 81: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-45

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

*6 If the sensor amplifier detection mode is other than peak-to-peak mode, a read

error occurs.

Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible

to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period.

*7 If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs. If this value is other

than standard difference display, a read error occurs in the expansion unit. If

this value is standard difference display, a read error occurs in the main unit.

*8 If the key lock function is being used in the main unit when simultaneous input

is set, a write error occurs in the expansion unit. If GT2-100* is being used, a

write error occurs in other than ID01 (main unit).

*9 If the key lock function is being used, a write error occurs.

*10 If self-timing is selected, a write error occurs. If simultaneous input is set, a

write error occurs in the main unit. If a connection is established with the

Assembly instance 65H(101) during cyclic communication, a write error

occurs.

*11 If the GT2-100* is being used, a write error occurs in other than ID01 (main

unit).

*12 Read and write are enabled only for the main unit (ID01)

*13 If calculation is performed, the expansion unit operates for the response time

set in the main unit.

*14 The main unit for which peak-to-peak mode, NG hold mode, or calculation-only

mode is set operates according to the external timing without reference to the

timing type setting.

*15 If an unselectable setting is set, a write error occurs. Unselectable settings are

saved in EEPROM but not reflected in operation.

*16 If the GT2-100* is used, read and write are enabled only for ID01 (main unit).

If other than the GT2-100* is used, a read error occurs during reading and a

write error occurs during writing.

*17 If other than the GT2-71* is used, a read error occurs during reading and a

write error occurs during writing.

*18 If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs.

If a standard difference display is set for the main unit, a read error occurs. If a

standard difference display is set for the expansion unit, a read error occurs in

parameters for units other than the main unit (ID01) and the local unit. If other

than the standard difference display is set for the expansion unit, a read error

occurs.

If detection mode is peak-to-peak mode, a read error occurs.

*19 If the calculation mode and calculation setting that cannot be set within the

current number of connected sensor amplifiers are written, a write error occurs.

If the calculation function is used, the sensor amplifiers can hold only the

calculated P.V. values. Reading this attribute ID makes it possible to read

the R.V. values of each sensor amplifier on which the held calculation

results were based. Therefore, the R.V. values of each sensor amplifiers

on which the held calculation results were based can be read without

being affected by communication response delay.

Reference

Page 82: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-46

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 0EH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Using DL Object

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed

value).0EH

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".0324H(804)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

data

The settings of the read parameter are

returned.0000H

Page 83: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-47

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 3-33).

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 16H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).

10H

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".

0347H(839)

Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)

00H

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Page 84: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-48

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes"(Page 3-33).

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4BH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)

The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation

command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.

The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.

• Commands

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Name Description Attribute ID

Perform preset request Executes preset. 0301H(769)

Perform preset reset request Executes preset reset. 0302H(770)

Reset request Executes reset. 0303H(771)

Error clear request Executes error clear. 0304H(772)

Initial reset request Resets the value to the initial value. 0305H(773)

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"

(fixed value).4BH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number

(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H

Page 85: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-49

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 3-33).

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected

to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4CH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Service Data

Attribute ID

Designates the attribute ID to be designated

from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation

commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute

IDs supported by the instance service 4BH

(operation command)" (Page 3-48)

0301H(769)

Service Data There is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

Page 86: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-50

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

• If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to theDL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensoramplifier are not changed).

• If the device is key locked, message communication cannot switch thebank.

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"

(fixed value).4CH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a

command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H

Attribute ID There is no data. -

Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Point

Page 87: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

3-4 Message Communication

3-51

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from

the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4DH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 3-33).

Item Description Data Example

Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".

03A1H

(929)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 14H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Page 88: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -3-52

MEMO

3

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

the G

T2 S

erie

s

Page 89: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 4-1

4Communicating with

GT-70A Series

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that

communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit

and a communication timing chart.

4-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 4-2

4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 4-3

4-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 4-5

4-4 Message Communication................................. 4-21

Page 90: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-2

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

4-1 What is EtherNet/IP?

EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The

specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).

Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-

Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).

Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial

Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used

together with the network.

Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a

communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which

opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the

"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and

receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which

sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.

Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according

to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to

be adjusted for data exchange.

Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and

responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications

which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and

writing adaptor settings.

What is EtherNet/IP?

Scanner

Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor

High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)

Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)

Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)

Page 91: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 4-3

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.

The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and

message EtherNet/IP communications.

The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

IN area

OUT area

Output

Current value

Error information

External input

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1

Sensor amplifier

Message communication

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

IN area

OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters

Cyclic communicationExternal input

Setting value

Cyclic communication

Overview of Communication Methods

Function of sensor amplifier

Communication Methods

Cyclic communication(Page 4-5)

Message Communication(Page 4-21)

Read status

Read output

Read current value

Execute external input

Change bank number

X

Rewrite setting value

Motion command

Read current value, setting,

and status

Read number of decimal

places

Rewrite setting value

Lock all

Page 92: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-4

4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Cyclic communication

This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set

RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the

sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without

ladder programs.

Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.

Message communication

Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a

punctuality like cyclic communication.

In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be

exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific

to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.

PLC EtherNet/IP scanner

RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*

RPI=5 (ms)*

RPI=10 (ms)*

Various EtherNet/IP adaptors

Ethernet

* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.

Point

Page 93: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 4-5

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

4-3 Cyclic communication

This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.

What is cyclic communication?

Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device

in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).

In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully

opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.

The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be

opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:

(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.

(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.

(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the

connection.

(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open

the connection.)

"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 4-20)

Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor

amplifier as follows:

To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not

support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use

"Message Communication" (Page 4-21).

(1) Request connection open

(3) Open connection

(2) Check compatibility

Output data

Data reflected in thescanner

Input data

The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

IN area

OUT area

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Reference

Page 94: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-6

4-3 Cyclic communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

(1) Set the connection to be used.

(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.

Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.

(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)

Cyclic communication can use the following functions:

(1) Read status

(2) Read output (Page 4-17)

Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output

(3) Read P.V. value (Page 4-18)

(4) Execute external input (Page 4-19)

Inputs that can be used: PRESET, TIMING, RESET

Configuring Cyclic Communication

Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication

Page 95: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-3 Cyclic communication

4-7

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic

communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type

usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.

The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:

• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection

type supports both point-to-point and multicast.

• The details of each application type are as follows:

Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data

transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data

transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is

made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)

data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the

settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be

opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).

Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1

to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only

monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an

"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-

EP1).

(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,

set the Connection Type to Multicast.

Usable Connections

NoConnection

NameInput/Output

Assembly Instance

Size(Byte)

RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)

Application Type

1

Monitor Data

And External

Input

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 ms

Exclusive

OwnerScanner to

DL-EP165H (101) 10

2Monitor Data

(Input Only)

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 msInput Only

Scanner to

DL-EP1FEH (254) 0

Reference

Page 96: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-8

4-3 Cyclic communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.

The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into

an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order

byte.

Example)

Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner IN area

Address 0Address 1

Address 167

Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Reference

16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41

16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43

12H 34H

56H 78H

High-order byte Low-order byte

High-order byte Low-order byte

56H43

78H42

12H41

34H40

32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51

12H51

34H50

56H49

78H48

12H 34H 56H 78H

Page 97: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-3 Cyclic communication

4-9

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H

This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.

For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 4-11).

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/

Current Value 1" (Page 4-12).

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Status

0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1

Error Status

1 Error StatusWarningStatus

Reserved for system

SensorError

Status

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

SensorWarningStatus

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0

OverRange

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0UnderRange

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0Invalid

10 ID08 . . . . . ID01

11Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1

OverRange

12 ID08 . . . . . ID01

13Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1UnderRange

14 ID08 . . . . . ID01

15Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1Invalid

16 ID08 . . . . . ID01

17Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 1 (HIGH)

18 ID08 . . . . . ID01

19Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 2 (LOW)

20 ID08 . . . . . ID01

21Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 3 (GO)

22 ID08 . . . . . ID01

23Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 4 (Unassigned)

24 ID08 . . . . . ID01

25Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 5 (Unassigned)

26 ID08 . . . . . ID01

27Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 98: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-10

4-3 Cyclic communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

External Input

Response 1(Preset)

28 ID08 . . . . . ID01

29Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 2(Timing)

30 ID08 . . . . . ID01

31Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 3(Reset)

32 ID08 . . . . . ID01

33Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 4(Unassigned)

34 ID08 . . . . . ID01

35Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 5(Unassigned)

36 ID08 . . . . . ID01

37Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

ErrorID Number

40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

41

ErrorCode

42Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

43

WarningID Number

44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

45

Warning Code

46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

47

Current Value 0

(Comparator Value (P.V.)

or Raw Value (R.V.))

48

ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49

50

51

: :

104

ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105

106

107

Current Value 1

(Unassigned)

108

ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109

110

111

: :

164

ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165

166

167

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Page 99: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-3 Cyclic communication

4-11

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Parameter List

Item Description

DL-EP1 Error

Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.

ON: An error occurred.

OFF: No error occurred.

Warning Status (Unassigned)

Error Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor

amplifiers are output.

When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0

is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".

ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor

amplifiers.

OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.

Sensor Error Status

The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is

output.

ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

Sensor Warning

Status(Unassigned)

Current Value n

Over Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is greater than the measurement upper limit.

OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is less than the measurement upper limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.)

Current Value n

Under Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less

than the measurement lower limit.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

greater than the measurement lower limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.)

Current Value n

Invalid

(n: 0 to 1)

The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

invalid.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

valid (normal).

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.)

Output n (n: 1 to 5)

The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target

ID number is output.

Output 1: HIGH output

Output 2: LOW output

Output 3: GO output

Output 4: HH output*1

Output 5: LL output*1

ON: Output n is output.

OFF: Output n is not output.

External Input

Response

n (n: 1 to 5)

An external input response is output when the corresponding external input

request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.

The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.

ON: The external input request was made (ON).

OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).

For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 4-18).

Page 100: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-12

4-3 Cyclic communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Current Value 0/Current Value 1

Error ID Number

If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and

the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID

number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs

in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest

priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

Error Code

If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is

stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor

amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

"Error code list" (Page 4-13)

Warning ID

Number(Unassigned)

Warning Code (Unassigned)

Current Value n

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value

0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the

current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value

1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0

to 1) depend on the use conditions.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.)

"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 4-12)

Item Description

Name Model Conditions Function

Current Value 0

Main unit/

expansion unit

When calculation mode is

OFFComparator value (P.V.)

Main unitWhen calculation mode is ON

(Standard difference)

Comparator value (P.V.)

Expansion unitWhen calculation mode is ON(Standard difference)

Raw value (R.V.)

Main unit/

expansion unit

When calculation mode is ON(Other than standard difference)

Comparator value (P.V.)

Current Value 1Main unit/

expansion unit- (Unassigned)

Page 101: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-3 Cyclic communication

4-13

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Error code list

The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.

DL-EP1

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

0

0 No error - -

51Unassigned ID

error

The main unit assigned no ID

within 10 seconds after the

DL-EP1 had been started.

• Check if the number of

connected sensor

amplifiers exceeds the

maximum number of

sensor amplifiers that can

be connected to the main

unit.

"Connectable Sensor

Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)

• Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on

again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

52Start-time

communication error

Communication between

sensor amplifiers ended

abnormally before ID

assignment completion.

Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

53

Unsupported

sensor amplifier

connection error

A sensor amplifier not

supported by the DL-EP1 is

connected.

Check the model of the

connected sensor amplifier

and remove the sensor

amplifier if it is not supported

by the DL-EP1.

54 Mixed model error

Sensor amplifiers outside the

specifications have a mixed

connection.

Check if the models are

mixable.

"Mixed Connection of

Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)

55Start-time

communication error

ID number assignment is

successful but

communication failed during

the subsequent initial

communication.

Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

56Current limitation

error

The number of connected

sensor amplifiers exceeds

the allowable range.

Use sensor amplifiers within

the allowable range.

57

Communication

error between

sensor amplifiers

An error occurred during

communication between

sensor amplifiers.

Check if there is a noise

source around the DL-EP1.

If the sensor communication

indicator is flashing red, turn

the power on again.

70IP address

duplicate error

The IP address is the same

as another device.

Check the IP address

setting.

Page 102: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-14

4-3 Cyclic communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

GT-70A Series

Warning code list

No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the GT-70A Series sensor amplifiers

connected to the DL-EP1.

0

100 System error The IP address is incorrect.

Contact your nearest

KEYENCE office.

101 System errorA default gateway setting

error occurred.

102 System error

An attempt to read data in

EEPROM such as the MAC

address has failed.

103 System errorAn attempt to start the

protocol stack has failed.

104 System errorAn attempt to access

FlashROM has failed.

150 System errorThe number of held IDs is

incorrect.

151 System errorThe number of sensors is

incorrect.

152 System error An initial read error occurred.

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

01H to

0FH

(Each

ID

number)

01H

Sensor amplifier

error 1 of each ID

number

Overcurrent error (ErC)

Refer to the GT-70A Series

User's Manual.

02H

Sensor amplifier

error 2 of each ID

number

Head error (ErH)

03H

Sensor amplifier

error 3 of each ID

number

EEPROM error (ErE)

04H

Sensor amplifier

error 4 of each ID

numbe

Jam check error

(Er.ChK)

05H

Sensor amplifier

error 5 of each ID

number

Self-timing

delay error

(Er.dLY)

06H

Sensor amplifier

error 6 of each ID

number

Number-of-units error

(Er.Unit)

07H

Sensor amplifier

error 7 of each ID

number

Calculation error(Er.CAL)

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

Page 103: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-3 Cyclic communication

4-15

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP

scanner.

External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H

Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner's OUT area

Address 0Address 1

Address 9

External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

External

Input

Request 1

(Preset)

0 ID08 . . . . . ID01

1Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 2

(Timing)

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 3

(Reset)

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 4

(Error Clear)

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 5

(Unassigned)

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 104: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-16

4-3 Cyclic communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Parameter List

Name Function Operation

External

Input

Request 1

Preset

ON: Executes preset. Executing preset turns on external input

response 1.

OFF: Turns off external input response 1.

External

Input

Request 2

Timing

execution

ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input

response 2.

OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input

response 2.

External

Input

Request 3

Reset Request

ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input

response 3.

OFF: Turns off external input response 3.

External

Input

Request 4

(Unassigned) (Unassigned)

External

Input

Request 5

(Unassigned) (Unassigned)

Page 105: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-3 Cyclic communication

4-17

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1

(cyclic communication).

"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-17)

"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-18)

"Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 4-19)

For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"

(Page 4-4).

Reading an output from a sensor amplifier

Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, and GO

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 4-9)

This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic

communication.

Communication Methods

PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0

Sensor amplifier (1)Output

HIGH output of ID 01

10

ONOFF

Page 106: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-18

4-3 Cyclic communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier

Available external inputs: PRESET, TIMING, RESET

Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance

(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 4-15)

This example shows how to enter a TIMING input to the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was

assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor

amplifier is turned on or off.

(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input

response.

To use the TIMING input, set the "Timing Type" of the sensor amplifier to"External Timing Input". Also, set Input (pink/purple wire) func. 2. to Bankswitching B (bank B).

After the external input is executed, the button operation of the sensor

amplifiers is locked for about 10 seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is

displayed for about 2 seconds during switching to the locked state or

when an attempt is made to operate a locked button. When button

operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock ( )" is displayed for about 2

seconds. However, the initialization screen appears when an initialization

reset is executed. If an external input is repeatedly executed when the

initialization screen is being displayed, the initialization screen is retained.

PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [2]Bit0

(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0

Sensor amplifierExternal InputExternal input 2 to ID 01

10

ONOFF

10

Point

Reference

Page 107: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-3 Cyclic communication

4-19

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers

Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of

each sensor amplifier is assigned.

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 4-9)

This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers

ID01, ID02, and ID03.

(1)When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator

value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.

If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -199.9999 to 199.9999.

If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is

retained without updating the current value.

(2)The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of

IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current

Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a

sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID

number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1.

*For the GT-70A Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.

PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]

Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

IN area [48 to 51]

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

IN area [52 to 55]

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

IN area [56 to 59]

Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

(1)

Page 108: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-20

4-3 Cyclic communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the

DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1

to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a

connection is opened.

When using scanners of other manufacturers

For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each

scanner.

Checking the Device Compatibility

Page 109: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 4-21

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

4-4 Message Communication

This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.

What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?

Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing

commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each

EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not

require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor

settings.

The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication

include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the

device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,

to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.

The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined

UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.

Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

Send

Receive

Receive

Send

(1) Message communication command

(3) Message communication response

(2) Interpret and execute command

Reference

Page 110: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-22

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and

send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"

(Page 4-25)

Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable

commands.

The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication

when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-45)

Configuring Message Communication

Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication

Command

Response:123456

GT-7∗A Comparator values (P. V. values): 123456

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)

GT-7∗A

Page 111: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-23

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-46)

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DL-

EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-47)

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1.

* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank.

"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 4-49)

Command:6000

Response

GT-7∗A jam detection position: 5000→6000

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0399H(921)Service data: 6000

GT-7∗A

Command

Response

Preset execution by GT-7∗A

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0301H(769)

GT-7∗A

Command

Response

Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H

GT-7*A

Page 112: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-24

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read

from the sensor amplifier.

"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier" (Page 4-50)

For the GT-70A Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as

follows:

Data: 12530

Number of decimal places: 3

Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.

If message communication writes data to a sensor amplifier, issues anoperation command to the sensor amplifier, or locks sensor amplifieroperations, the sensor amplifier button operations are locked for about 10

seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds duringswitching to the locked state or when an attempt is made to operate alocked button. When button operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock

( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds.

Command

Response

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)

GT-7∗A

Reads the number of decimal places of the GT-7∗A comparator value (P.V. value).

Reference

12530 12.530 12.53mmNumber of decimal places

3 2 1

Point

Page 113: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-25

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.

Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter

change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal

places (5), etc.

Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor

amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the

comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it

possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers

corresponding to the respective instances.

Objects and Services

Parameter change(3)

Operation command execution(4)

Read of the number of decimal places(5)

DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1

Object(1)

(2)

Service

Data output

ID: 0324H Output

Attribute

ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate)

ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value)

DL Object(Class ID: 67H)

DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H

ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H

ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H

:

:

Page 114: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-26

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to

express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects

abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a

group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same

type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a

class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each

uses a unique attribute value.

• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.

The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A

command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance

ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the

command also requires a setting (service data).

* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.

"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"

(Page 4-28)

Reference

Command Response

・Service

・Class ID

・Instance ID

・Attribute ID*

・Service data*

・General Status

・Additional Status*

・Service response data*

Page 115: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-27

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.

Objects Usable by DL-EP1

Command

Response

DLObject

MessageRouterObject

ConnectionManagerObject

AssemblyObject

IdentityObject

TCP/IPInterfaceObject

EthernetLink

Object

EtherNet/IP unit

Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage

DL Object 67H

This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and

the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and

writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to

the DL-EP1.

4-31

Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,

general information and a reset service, etc.9-22

Message Router

Object02H

This object provides connection points for message

communication.9-25

Assembly Object 04H

This object provides access to the devices via cyclic

communication. This object can be used to send data

to the devices that do not support cyclic

communication.

9-26

Connection

Manager Object06H

This object is used for connection-type

communication.9-28

TCP/IP Interface

ObjectF5H

This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/

IP network interface. You can set an IP address,

subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.

9-30

Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34

Page 116: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-28

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for

communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of

Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to

the scanner.

Commands

• Command format

*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-

31) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).

Responses

• Response format

Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication

Item Description

Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).

Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Item Description

General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H

is returned when the command ends normally.

Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).

Service response

data

Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the

command.

Page 117: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-29

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Command processing order and error response

Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:

Supplement for object processing

• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service

data.

• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is

executed, ignoring Attribute ID.

• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),

"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.

• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size

is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is

returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is

executed, ignoring the excessive data.

Class ID check

Yes

No

Instance ID check

Yes

No

Service check

Yes

No

Attribute ID check

Executes supported service process

Yes

No

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status

Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status

Page 118: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-30

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Reading the attribute ID

Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID

Data Type

The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:

Reading the DL Object Table

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Instance ID

Attribute ID

Name Description Attribute Data Type

00H74H

(116)

Output

1

Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each

sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is set to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9 ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Item Description

(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.

(2) Attribute ID Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.

(3) Name Represents the attribute name.

(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of

parameters that can be set.

(5) Attribute

Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.

R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,

Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.

W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used

to write the attribute value.

(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.

Data Type DescriptionRange

Minimum Maximum

INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767

UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535

DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647

WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -

DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -

STRING

Character string

(2-byte length information +

1-byte array per character)

- -

Page 119: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-31

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This

object is unique to the DL-EP1.

Services

*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH)

connected to the DL-EP1.

*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID 90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.

DL Object (Class ID:67H)

Service Code Service Name Description

0EHParameter

read

Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"

(Page 4-45).

10HParameter

write

Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 4-46).

4BH*1 Operation

command

Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of

processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.

Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the

object.

refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service

4BH (operation command)" (Page 4-47). For examples of

using this service, refer to

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 4-47).

4CHBatch lock

setting*2

Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected

sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported

by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor

amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code

09H is returned as a response.

Setting 0: Not lock

Setting 1: Key lock

"Lock setting" (Page 4-32)

For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking

sensor amplifier operations" (Page 4-49).

* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch

the bank.

4DH

Acquisition of the

number of decimal

places *3

Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated

parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)

Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from

a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-50).

Page 120: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-32

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

• Lock setting

Responses

The responses made when each service is used are as follows:

(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH

(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H

(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH

(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH

(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH

Setting Description

0 Does not execute lock.

1Executes full key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen

display switching).

GeneralStatus

Command TypeDescription

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

00H Normal end

05H The instance ID is out of range.

08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or

cannot be executed.

09H - - - - The written data is out of range.

0CH - - -

• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled

by cyclic communication.

• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.

Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation

command.

0EH - - - -

• An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that

cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the

unwritable status.

• The written data is out of range.

10H - - - -

An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that

cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the

unreadable status.

13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.

The defined data size is stored in the additional status.

14H - The attribute ID is out of range.

16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated

instance ID is not connected.

1FH

• This service is supported by the designated instance ID

but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.

(Additional status: C350H)

• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be

written into the parameter.

(Additional status: C351H)

• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional

status: C352H)

FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Page 121: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-33

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Attributes

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

00H

64H

(100)Status

Indicates the status of this unit and connected

sensor amplifier.

Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status

Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system

Bit 14: Warning Status

Bit 15: Error Status

R WORD

65H

(101)

Sensor Error

Status

Indicates the error status of the connected

senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the

corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned

to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

66H

(102)

Warning

Status(Unassigned) R WORD

67H

(103)Reserved for system

68H

(104)

Current

Value 0

Property

Indicates the status of current value 0 of each

amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",

“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit

corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

69H

(105)

Current

Value 1

Property

Indicates the status of current value 1 of each

amplifier. If the current value 1 is "0ver Range",

"Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding

to the ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

6AH

(106) to

6BH

(107)

Reserved for system

6CH

(108)

Error ID

Number

Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.

Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)R UINT

6DH

(109)Error Code

Indicates the error code that is happening.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

6EH

(110)

Warning ID

Number(Unassigned) R UINT

6FH

(111)

Warning

Code(Unassigned) R UINT

70H

(112) to

73H

(115)

Reserved for system

74H

(116)

Output1

(HIGH)

Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of

each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Page 122: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-34

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

00H

75H

(117)

Output2

(LOW)

Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of

each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

76H

(118)

Output3

(GO)

Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each

amplifier. When GO is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

77H

(119)

Output4

(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD

78H

(120)

Output5

(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD

79H

(121) to

89H

(137)

Reserved for system

8AH

(138)

Current

Value 0

Invalid

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8BH

(139)

Current

Value 0

Under Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less

than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit

of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8CH

(140)

Current

Value 0

Over Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

higher than the upper limit of the detection range,

the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8DH

(141)

Current

Value 1

Invalid

When the current value 1 of each amplifier is

invalid, the bit of the corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8EH

(142)

Current

Value 1

Under Range

When the current value 1 of each amplifier is less

than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit

of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8FH

(143)

Current

Value 1 Over

Range

When the current value 1 of each amplifier is

higher than the upper limit of the detection

range, the bit of the corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 123: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-35

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

00H

90H

(144)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 1)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 1.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

91H

(145)

to 98H

(152)

:

99H

(153)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 10)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor ID

number 10.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

9AH

(154)

to 9FH

(159)

Reserved for system

A0H

(160)

Current

Value 1 (ID

Number 1)

Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID

number 1.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

A1H

(161)

to A8H

(168)

:

A9H

(169)

Current

Value 1 (ID

Number 10)

Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID

number 10.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

AAH

(170)

to AFH

(175)

Reserved for system

B0H

(176)

Sensor

Status Mask

Setting

Set up the condition to determine if the sensor

error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error

(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS

LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or

warning occurs.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Not mask

1: Mask

R/W UINT

B1H

(177)

Sensor

Connected

Number

Indicates the number of connected sensor

amplifiers.

Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)

R UINT

B2H

(178)

to C7H

(199)

Reserved for system

0300H

(768)

Error Code

(ID number

00)

Indicates the error code of ID number 0.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 124: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-36

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current

Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 4-12).

00H

0301H

(769)

to

0309H

(777)

:

030AH

(778)

Error Code

(ID number

10)

Indicates the error code of ID number 10.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

030BH

(779)

to

04FFH

(1279)

Reserved for system

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Reference

Page 125: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-37

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Attributes for GT-70A Series (Common to all GT-70A Series)

Designate the ID number (01H to 0AH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.

Class Attribute ID

Name Description Attribute Data Type

Group1

0320H

(800)

Group1

Entry count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can

be set in Group 1.

Parameter range: 9

R DINT

0321H

(801)

Sensor

amplifier

error state*1

Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier.

bit0: Overcurrent error (ErC)

bit1: Head error (ErH)

bit2: EEPROM error (ErE)

bit3: Jam check error (Er.chK)

bit4: Self-timing delay (Er.dLY)

bit5: Number-of-units error (Er.Unit)

bit6: Calculation error(Er.CAL)

R DWORD

0322H

(802) to

0323H

(803)

Reserved for system

0324H

(804)

Control

output*2

Indicates the control output status.

Parameter range: 00H to 1FH (initial value: 00H)

bit0: HIGH output

bit1: LOW output

bit2: GO output

R DWORD

0325H

(805)

Comparator

value (P.V.

Value)*3, *4, *5

Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value).

Parameter range:

-99.9999 to 999.9999

R DINT

0326H

(806)

Raw value

(R.V. Value)*3, *4, *5, *6

Indicates the raw value (R.V. value).

Parameter range:

-99.9999 to 999.9999

R DINT

0327H

(807)

Peak value

during

sampling *3, *4, *5, *6, *7

Indicates the peak value during sampling.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999R DINT

0328H

(808)

Bottom value

during

sampling *3, *4, *5, *6, *8

Indicates the bottom value during sampling.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999R DINT

0329H

(809)

Calculation

display

value*3, *4

Indicates the calculation display value.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999R DINT

Page 126: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-38

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Group2

032AH

(810)

to

033FH

(831)

Reserved for system

0340H

(832)

Group2 Entry

count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can

be set in Group 2.

Parameter range: 12

R DINT

0341H

(833)

Bank 0 HIGH

setting

Indicates the bank 0 HIGH setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000)

R/W DINT

0342H

(834)

Bank 0 LOW

setting

Indicates the bank 0 LOW setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0343H

(835)

Bank 0

preset value

Indicates the bank 0 preset value.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

0344H

(836)

Bank 1 HIGH

setting

Indicates the bank 1 HIGH setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000)

R/W DINT

0345H

(837)

Bank 1 LOW

setting

Indicates the bank 1 LOW setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0346H

(838)

Bank 1

preset value

Indicates the bank 1 preset value.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

0347H

(839)

Bank 2 HIGH

setting

Indicates the bank 2 HIGH setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000)

R/W DINT

0348H

(840)

Bank 2 LOW

setting

Indicates the bank 2 LOW setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0349H

(841)

Bank 2

preset value

Indicates the bank 2 preset value.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

034AH

(842)

Bank 3 HIGH

setting

Indicates the bank 3 HIGH setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000)

R/W DINT

034BH

(843)

Bank 3 LOW

setting

Indicates the bank 3 LOW setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

034CH

(844)

Bank 3

preset value

Indicates the bank 3 preset value.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

034DH

(845) to

035FH

(863)

Reserved for system

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 127: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-39

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Group3

0360H

(864)

Group3 Entry

count

Indicates the number of items

(number of entries) that can be set in Group 3.

Parameter range: 7

R DINT

0361H

(865)Key lock

Sets key lock.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Unlock

1: Key lock

R/W DINT

0362H

(866)

Bank

switching

state*9

Reads the currently operating bank.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (currently operating

bank)

R DINT

Rewrites the operating bank.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)

0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0.

1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1.

2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2.

3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3.

W DINT

0363H

(867)

Timing

status*10

Reads the timing status.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: The timing input is OFF or measurement is in

progress in self-timing mode.

1: The timing input is ON or measurement is not

in progress in self-timing mode.

R DINT

Writes the timing status.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Change was made during measurement.

1: Change was made during non-measurement.

W

0364H

(868) to

0366H

(870)

Reserved for system

0367H

(871)

Bar display

mode

Indicates bar display mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Bar display mode

1: OK/NG display mode

R/W DINT

0368H

(872) to

037FH

(895)

Reserved for system

Group4

0380H

(896)

Group4 Entry

count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can

be set in Group 4.

Parameter range: 26

R DINT

0381H

(897)

Calculation

mode and

Setting*11, *12

Indicates calculation mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 8 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: Maximum value

2: Minimum value

3: Flatness

4: Mean

5: Standard difference

6: Torsion

7: Warp

8: Thickness

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 128: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-40

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Group4

0382H

(898)

Detection

mode

Indicates detection mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: Standard

1: NG hold

2: Peak hold

3: Bottom hold

4: Peak-to-peak

R/W DINT

0383H

(899)Reserved for system

0384H

(900)

Response

time*13

Indicates the response time.

Parameter range: 0 to 6 (initial value: 3)

0: HSP (1.5)

1: 5 ms

2: 10 ms

3: 100 ms

4: 500 ms

5: 1000 ms

6: 5000 ms

R/W DINT

0385H

(901)

Timing

type*14

Indicates the timing type.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: External timing input

1: Rising edge self-timing

2: Falling edge self-timing

R/W DINT

0386H

(902)

Self-timing

level

Indicates the self timing level.

Parameter range: 199.9999

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.500)

R/W DINT

0387H

(903)

Self-timing

delay type

Indicates the self-timing delay type.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Static hold

1: Delay timer

R/W DINT

0388H

(904)

User-

specified

delay time

Indicates the user-specified delay time.

Parameter range: 0 to 9999

(initial value: 1000)

R/W DINT

0389H

(905)

Delay stable

determination

Sets the static hold delay stable determination.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Default

1: User

R/W DINT

038AH

(906)

Delay stable

range

Sets the static hold delay stable range.

Parameter range:

0.000 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.010)

R/W DINT

038BH

(907)

Measurement

direction

Sets the measurement increase/decrease

direction.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Normal

1: Reversed

R/W DINT

038CH

(908)Multiplier

Indicates the multiplier.

Parameter range: 0.1 to 100.0

(Initial value: 1.0)

R/W DINT

038DH

(909)Output mode

Indicates output mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: N.O.

1: N.C.

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 129: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-41

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Group4

038EH

(910)

Display

resolution

Sets the display resolution.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)

0:0.001

1:0.01

2:0.1

3:1

R/W DINT

038FH

(911)Hysteresis

Sets the hysteresis.

Parameter range:

0.000 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.003)

R/W DINT

0390H

(912)

Input (purple

wire) func. 1

Sets input (purple wire) func. 1.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Bank A

1: Reset

R/W DINT

0391H

(913)

Input (pink/

purple wire)

func. 2

Sets input (pink/purple wire) func. 2.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Timing input

1: Bank B

R/W DINT

0392H

(914) to

0394H

(916)

Reserved for system

0395H

(917)

Store preset

value

Set up store preset value.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0:YES

1:NO

R/W DINT

0396H

(918)Reserved for system

0397H

(919)

Power save

(eco)

function

Set up power save (eco) function.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0:OFF

1:HALF

2:ALL

R/W DINT

0398H

(920)Core alarm

Set up core alarm.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0:OFF

1:ON

2:USER

R/W DINT

0399H

(921)

Check point

setting

Set up check point setting.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.500)

R/W DINT

039AH

(922)

Display filter

function

Set up display filter function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0:ON

1:OFF

R/W DINT

039BH

(923)

to

039FH

(927)

Reserved for system

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 130: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-42

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

Group5

03A0H

(928)

Group5

Entry count

Indicates the number of items

(number of entries) that can be set in Group 5.

Parameter range: 10

R DINT

03A1H

(929)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID1*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of main unit (ID number

1) on which the calculation result was based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03A2H

(930)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID2*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 2) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03A3H

(931)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID3*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 3) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03A4H

(932)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID4*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 4) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03A5H

(933)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID5*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 5) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03A6H

(934)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID6*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 6) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03A7H

(935)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID7*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 7) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03A8H

(936)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID8*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 8) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03A9H

(937)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID9*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 9) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03AAH

(938)

R.V. (base of

calc.) ID10*4, *15

Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID

number 10) on which the calculation result was

based.

Parameter range:

-999.999 to 1000.000

R DINT

03ABH

(939) to

03BFH

(959)

Reserved for system

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 131: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-43

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

*1 You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/

OFF status of each bit.

OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred.

Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to

"GT-70A Series User's Manual".

*2 You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of

each bit.

*3 Use this attribute in combination with the comparator value property or

comparator value information (invalid/over/under).

*4 If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.9999 to

999.9999.

If this value is Current Value Over Range, 999.9999 is stored.

If this value is Current Value Under Range, -999.9999 is stored.

If this value is Current Value Invalid, -999.9998 is stored.

If this value is Error, 1000.0000 is stored.

*5 If this value is other than standard difference display, a read error occurs in the

expansion unit. For calculation-only mode, a read error occurs in the main unit.

Group6

03C0H

(960)

Group6

Entry count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can

be set in Group 6.

Parameter range: 11

R DINT

03C1H

(961)Product code

Indicates the product code.

Parameter range:

Main unit : 4000

Expansion unit : 4001

R DINT

03C2H

(962)Revision

Indicates the revision.

Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFHR DINT

03C3H

(963) to

03C7H

(967)

Reserved for system

03C8H

(968)

Product

name

Indicates the product name.

Parameter range:

Main unit : "GT-71A*/75A* "

Expansion unit : "GT-72A*/76A* "

R STRING

03C9H

(969) to

03D6H

(982)

Reserved for system

03D7H

(983)Series code

Indicates the series code.

Parameter range:

Main unit : 4000

Expansion unit : 4001

R DINT

03D8H

(984)Series version

Indicates the series version.

Parameter range: 1R DINT

03D9H

(985)Device type

Indicates the device type.

Parameter range: 0R DINT

03DAH

(986) to

03DFH

(991)

Reserved for system

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 132: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-44

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

*6 If the sensor amplifier detection mode is other than peak-to-peak mode, a read

error occurs.

*7 Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible

to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period.

*8 If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs.

*9 If the key lock function is being used, a write error occurs.

*10 The timing status can be written only when the sensor amplifier setting satisfies

the following two conditions:

- The external timing function is selected as the timing type.

- Bank switching B (bank B) is selected as Input (pink/purple wire) func. 2.

*11 Read and write are enabled only for the main unit (ID01)

*12 If the settings cannot be used with the current number of sensor amplifiers, a

write error occurs.

*13 If calculation is performed, the expansion unit operates for the response time

set in the main unit.

*14 The main unit for which peak-to-peak mode, NG hold mode, or calculation-only

mode is set operates according to the external timing without reference to the

timing type setting.

*15 This attribute can be used only when the calculation function is used.

If the calculation setting is other than standard difference display, this attribute

is valid only for the main unit (ID01). Message communication reads the R.V.

value of each of the expansion units (ID01 to ID09) used for calculation from

the main unit.

If the calculation setting is standard difference display, this attribute is valid

only for expansion units. Message communication reads the R.V. value of each

expansion unit and the R.V. value of the main unit.

If the calculation function is used, the sensor amplifiers can hold only the

calculated P.V. values. Check the R.V. value of each sensor amplifier on

which the calculation results were based using R.V. (base of calc.).

Reference

Page 133: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-45

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 0EH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Using DL Object

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed

value).0EH

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".0324H(804)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

data

The settings of the read parameter are

returned.0000H

Page 134: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-46

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 4-33).

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 16H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).

10H

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".

0347H(839)

Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)

00H

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Page 135: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-47

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-31) and "Attributes"(Page 4-33).

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4BH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)

The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation

command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.

The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Name Description Attribute ID

Perform preset request Executes preset. 0301H(769)

Perform preset reset request Executes preset reset. 0302H(770)

Reset request Executes reset. 0303H(771)

Error clear requestClears the jam check error (Er.Chk)

and self-timing delay error (Er.dLY).0304H(772)

Initial reset request

Restores all the settings* to the default

settings.

• The span adjustment results set in

proofreading setting are not

initialized.

0305H(773)

Page 136: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-48

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 4-33).

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"

(fixed value).4BH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number

(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H

Attribute ID

Designates the attribute ID to be designated

from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation

commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute

IDs supported by the instance service 4BH

(operation command)" (Page 4-47)

0301H(769)

Service Data There is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Page 137: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

4-4 Message Communication

4-49

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected

to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4CH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Service Data

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

• If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to theDL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensoramplifier are not changed).

• If the device is key locked, message communication cannot switch thebank.

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"

(fixed value).4CH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a

command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H

Attribute ID There is no data. -

Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Point

Page 138: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-50

4-4 Message Communication

4

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

GT-7

0A

Serie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from

the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4DH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 4-33).

Item Description Data Example

Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".

03A1H

(929)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 14H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Page 139: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

5-1- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5Communicating with

IG Series

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that

communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit

and a communication timing chart.

5-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 5-2

5-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 5-3

5-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 5-5

5-4 Message Communication................................. 5-21

Page 140: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -5-2

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

5-1 What is EtherNet/IP?

EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The

specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).

Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-

Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).

Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial

Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used

together with the network.

Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a

communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which

opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the

"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and

receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which

sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.

Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according

to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to

be adjusted for data exchange.

Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and

responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications

which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and

writing adaptor settings.

What is EtherNet/IP?

Scanner

Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor

High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)

Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)

Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)

Page 141: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 5-3

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

5-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.

The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and

message EtherNet/IP communications.

The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

IN area

OUT area

Output

Current value

Error information

External input

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1

Sensor amplifier

Message communication

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

IN area

OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters

Cyclic communicationExternal input

Setting value

Cyclic communication

Overview of Communication Methods

Function of sensor amplifier

Communication Methods

Cyclic communication(Page 5-5)

Message Communication(Page 5-21)

Read status

Read output

Read current value

Execute external input

Change bank number

X

Rewrite setting value

Motion command

Read current value, setting,

and status

Read number of decimal

places

Rewrite setting value

Lock all

Page 142: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

5-4

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Cyclic communication

This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set

RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the sensor

amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without ladder

programs.

Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.

Message communication

Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a

punctuality like cyclic communication.

In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be

exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific

to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.

PLC EtherNet/IP scanner

RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*

RPI=5 (ms)*

RPI=10 (ms)*

Various EtherNet/IP adaptors

Ethernet

* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.

Point

Page 143: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 5-5

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

5-3 Cyclic communication

This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.

What is cyclic communication?

Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device

in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).

In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully

opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.

The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be

opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:

(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.

(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.

(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the

connection.

(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open

the connection.)

"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 5-20)

Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor

amplifier as follows:

To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not

support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use

"Message Communication" (Page 5-21).

(1) Request connection open

(3) Open connection

(2) Check compatibility

Output data

Data reflected in thescanner

Input data

The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

IN area

OUT area

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Reference

Page 144: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-6

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

(1) Set the connection to be used.

(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.

Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.

(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)

Cyclic communication can use the following functions:

(1) Read status

(2) Read output (Page 5-17)

Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, edge check

output

(3) Read P.V. value (Page 5-18)

(4) Execute external input (Page 5-19)

Inputs that can be used: Zero shift, timing, reset, standard waveform registration,

laser emission stop

Configuring Cyclic Communication

Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication

Page 145: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-7

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic

communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type

usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.

The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:

• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection

type supports both point-to-point and multicast.

• The details of each application type are as follows:

Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data

transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data

transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is

made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)

data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the

settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be

opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).

Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1

to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only

monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an

"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-

EP1).

(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,

set the Connection Type to Multicast.

Usable Connections

NoConnection

NameInput/Output

Assembly Instance

Size(Byte)

RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)

Application Type

1

Monitor Data

And External

Input*1

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 ms

Exclusive

OwnerScanner to

DL-EP165H (101) 10

2Monitor Data

(Input Only)*1

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 msInput Only

Scanner to

DL-EP1FEH (254) 0

Reference

Page 146: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-8

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.

The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into

an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order

byte.

Example)

Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner IN area

Address 0Address 1

Address 167

Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Reference

16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41

16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43

12H 34H

56H 78H

High-order byte Low-order byte

High-order byte Low-order byte

56H43

78H42

12H41

34H40

32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51

12H51

34H50

56H49

78H48

12H 34H 56H 78H

Page 147: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-9

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H

This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.

For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 5-11).

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/

Current Value 1" (Page 5-12).

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Status

0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1

Error Status

1 Error StatusWarningStatus

Reserved for system

SensorError

Status

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

SensorWarningStatus

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0

OverRange

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0UnderRange

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0Invalid

10 ID08 . . . . . ID01

11Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1

OverRange

12 ID08 . . . . . ID01

13Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1UnderRange

14 ID08 . . . . . ID01

15Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1Invalid

16 ID08 . . . . . ID01

17Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 1 (HIGH)

18 ID08 . . . . . ID01

19Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 2 (LOW)

20 ID08 . . . . . ID01

21Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 3 (GO)

22 ID08 . . . . . ID01

23Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 4 (Edge check)

24 ID08 . . . . . ID01

25Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 5(Unassigned)

26 ID08 . . . . . ID01

27Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 148: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-10

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

External Input

Response 1(Zero shift)

28 ID08 . . . . . ID01

29Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 2(Timing)

30 ID08 . . . . . ID01

31Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 3(Preset)

32 ID08 . . . . . ID01

33Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 4(Standard waveform)

34 ID08 . . . . . ID01

35Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 5(Laser

emission stop)

36 ID08 . . . . . ID01

37Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

ErrorID Number

40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

41

ErrorCode

42Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

43

WarningID Number

44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

45

Warning Code

46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

47

Current Value 0

(P.V. value)

48

ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49

50

51

: :

104

ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105

106

107

Current Value 1

(Unassigned)

108

ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109

110

111

: :

164

ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165

166

167

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Page 149: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-11

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Parameter List

Item Description

DL-EP1 Error

Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.

ON: An error occurred.

OFF: No error occurred.

Warning Status (Unassigned)

Error Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor

amplifiers are output.

When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0

is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".

ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor

amplifiers.

OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.

Sensor Error Status

The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is

output.

ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

Sensor Warning

Status(Unassigned)

Current Value n

Over Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is greater than the measurement upper limit.

OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is less than the measurement upper limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.)

Current Value n

Under Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less

than the measurement lower limit.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

greater than the measurement lower limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.)

Current Value n

Invalid

(n: 0 to 1)

The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

invalid.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

valid (normal).

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.)

Output n (n: 1 to 5)

The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target

ID number is output.

Output 1: HIGH output

Output 2: LOW output

Output 3: GO output

Output 4: Edge check output

Output 5: (Unassigned)

ON: Output n is output.

OFF: Output n is not output.

External Input

Response

n (n: 1 to 5)

An external input response is output when the corresponding external input

request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.

The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.

ON: The external input request was made (ON).

OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).

For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 5-18).

Page 150: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-12

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Current Value 0/Current Value 1

Error ID Number

If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and

the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID

number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs

in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest

priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

Error Code

If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is

stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor

amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

"Error code list" (Page 5-13)

Warning ID

Number(Unassigned)

Warning Code (Unassigned)

Current Value n

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value

0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the

current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value

1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0

to 1) depend on the use conditions.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.)

"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 5-12)

Item Description

Name Model Conditions Function

Current Value 0Main unit/

expansion unit

-P.V. value

Current Value 1Main unit/

expansion unit- (Unassigned)

Page 151: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-13

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Error code list

The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.

DL-EP1

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

0

0 No error - -

51Unassigned ID

error

The main unit assigned no ID

within 10 seconds after the

DL-EP1 had been started.

• Check if the number of

connected sensor

amplifiers exceeds the

maximum number of

sensor amplifiers that can

be connected to the main

unit.

"Connectable Sensor

Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)

• Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on

again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

52Start-time

communication error

Communication between

sensor amplifiers ended

abnormally before ID

assignment completion.

Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

53

Unsupported

sensor amplifier

connection error

A sensor amplifier not

supported by the DL-EP1 is

connected.

Check the model of the

connected sensor amplifier

and remove the sensor

amplifier if it is not supported

by the DL-EP1.

54 Mixed model error

Sensor amplifiers outside the

specifications have a mixed

connection.

Check if the models are

mixable.

"Mixed Connection of

Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)

55Start-time

communication error

ID number assignment is

successful but

communication failed during

the subsequent initial

communication.

Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

56Current limitation

error

The number of connected

sensor amplifiers exceeds

the allowable range.

Use sensor amplifiers within

the allowable range.

57

Communication

error between

sensor amplifiers

An error occurred during

communication between

sensor amplifiers.

Check if there is a noise

source around the DL-EP1.

If the sensor communication

indicator is flashing red, turn

the power on again.

70IP address

duplicate error

The IP address is the same

as another device.

Check the IP address

setting.

Page 152: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-14

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

IG Series

0

100 System error The IP address is incorrect.

Contact your nearest

KEYENCE office.

101 System errorA default gateway setting

error occurred.

102 System error

An attempt to read data in

EEPROM such as the MAC

address has failed.

103 System errorAn attempt to start the

protocol stack has failed.

104 System errorAn attempt to access

FlashROM has failed.

150 System errorThe number of held IDs is

incorrect.

151 System errorThe number of sensors is

incorrect.

152 System error An initial read error occurred.

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

01H to

0AH

(Each

ID

number)

01H

Sensor amplifier

error 1 of each ID

number

Overcurrent error

Refer to the IG Series User's

Manual.

02H

Sensor amplifier

error 2 of each ID

number

EEPROM error

03H

Sensor amplifier

error 3 of each ID

number

Head error

04H

Sensor amplifier

error 4 of each ID

numbe

T/R reverse connection error

05H

Sensor amplifier

error 5 of each ID

number

Receiver EEPROM error

06H

Sensor amplifier

error 6 of each ID

number

Receiver error

07H

Sensor amplifier

error 7 of each ID

number

Transmitter error

08H

Sensor amplifier

error 8 of each ID

number

Transmitter laser error

09H

Sensor amplifier

error 9 of each ID

number

Model mismatch error

0AH

Sensor amplifier

error 10 of each ID

number

Head error

(Standard Waveform)

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

Page 153: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-15

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Warning code list

No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the IG Series sensor amplifiers

connected to the DL-EP1.

The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP

scanner.

External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H

01H to

0AH

(Each ID number)

0BH

Sensor amplifier

error 11 of each ID

number

Standard waveform error 1-4

Refer to the IG Series User's Manual.

0CH

Sensor amplifier

error 12 of each ID

number

Communication error

0DH

Sensor amplifier

error 13 of each ID

number

Additional setting error

0EH

Sensor amplifier

error 14 of each ID

number

Calculation error

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner's OUT area

Address 0Address 1

Address 9

External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Name Address(Byte)

bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

External

Input

Request 1

(Zero shift)

0 ID08 . . . . . ID01

1Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 2

(Timing)

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 3

(Reset)

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 154: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-16

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Parameter List

External

Input

Request 4

(standard

waveform)

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 5

(Laser

emission

stop)

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Name Function Operation

External

Input

Request 1

Zero shift

ON: Executes zero shift. Executing zero shift turns on external input

response 1.

OFF: Turns off external input response 1.

External

Input

Request 2

Timing

execution

ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input

response 2.

OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input

response 2.

External

Input

Request 3

Reset Request

ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input

response 3.

OFF: Turns off external input response 3.

External

Input

Request 4

Registering the

standard

waveform

ON: Registers the standard waveform (gain adjustment). Registering

the standard waveform (gain adjustment) turns on external input

response 4.

OFF: Turns off external input response 4.

External

Input

Request 5

Laser emission

stop

ON: Stops laser emission. Stopping laser emission turns on external

input response 5.

OFF: Emits laser. Emitting laser turns off external input response 5.

Page 155: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-17

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1

(cyclic communication).

"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-17)

"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-18)

"Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 5-19)

For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"

(Page 5-4).

Reading an output from a sensor amplifier

Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, and edge check

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 5-9)

This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic

communication.

Communication Methods

PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0

Sensor amplifier (1)Output

HIGH output of ID 01

10

ONOFF

Page 156: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-18

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier

Available external inputs: Zero shift, timing, reset, standard waveform, laser emission

stop

Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance

(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 5-15)

This example shows how to enter a TIMING input to the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was

assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor

amplifier is turned on or off.

(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input

response.

If the external input or input signal line from cyclic communication is ON,the sensor amplifier recognizes that the external input is ON and executestiming input or laser transmission stop input.

PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [0]Bit0

(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0

Sensor amplifierExternal InputTiming input 2 to ID 01

10

ONOFF

10

Point

Page 157: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-19

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers

Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of

each sensor amplifier is assigned.

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 5-9)

This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers

ID01, ID02, and ID03.

(1)When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator

value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.

* If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998. If

the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is

retained without updating the current value.

(2)The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of

IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current

Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a

sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID

number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1.

* For the IG Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.

PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]

Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

IN area [48 to 51]

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

IN area [52 to 55]

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

IN area [56 to 59]

Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

(1)

Page 158: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-3 Cyclic communication

5-20

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the

DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1

to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a

connection is opened.

When using scanners of other manufacturers

For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each

scanner.

Checking the Device Compatibility

Page 159: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 5-21

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

5-4 Message Communication

This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.

What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?

Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing

commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each

EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not

require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor

settings.

The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication

include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the

device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,

to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.

The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined

UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.

Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

Send

Receive

Receive

Send

(1) Message communication command

(3) Message communication response

(2) Interpret and execute command

Reference

Page 160: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-22

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and

send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"

(Page 5-25)

Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable

commands.

The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication

when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-52)

Configuring Message Communication

Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication

Command

Response:12345

IG Comparator values (P. V. values): 12345

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)

IG

Page 161: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-23

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-53)

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DL-

EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-54)

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1.

* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank.

"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 5-57)

Command:500

Response

IG Auto hold trigger level: 100→500

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0389H(905)Service data: 500

IG

Command

Response

Zero shift execution by IG

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0301H(769)

IG

Command

Response

Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H

IG

Page 162: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-24

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read

from the sensor amplifier.

"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier" (Page 5-58)

For the IG Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as

follows:

Data: 12530

Number of decimal places: 3

Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.

Command

Response

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)

IG

Reads the number of decimal places of the IG comparator value (P.V. value).

Reference

12530 12.530 12.53mmNumber of decimal places

3 2 1

Page 163: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-25

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.

Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter

change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal

places (5), etc.

Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor

amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the

comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it

possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers

corresponding to the respective instances.

Objects and Services

Parameter change(3)

Operation command execution(4)

Read of the number of decimal places(5)

DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1

Object(1)

(2)

Service

Data output

ID: 0324H Output

Attribute

ID: 0325H P.V. value

ID: 0326H R.V. value

DL Object(Class ID: 67H)

DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H

ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H

ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H

:

:

Page 164: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-26

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to

express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects

abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a

group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same

type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a

class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each

uses a unique attribute value.

• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.

The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A

command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance

ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the

command also requires a setting (service data).

* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.

"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"

(Page 5-28)

Reference

Command Response

・Service

・Class ID

・Instance ID

・Attribute ID*

・Service data*

・General Status

・Additional Status*

・Service response data*

Page 165: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-27

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.

Objects Usable by DL-EP1

Command

Response

DLObject

MessageRouterObject

ConnectionManagerObject

AssemblyObject

IdentityObject

TCP/IPInterfaceObject

EthernetLink

Object

EtherNet/IP unit

Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage

DL Object 67H

This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and

the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and

writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to

the DL-EP1.

5-31

Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,

general information and a reset service, etc.9-22

Message Router

Object02H

This object provides connection points for message

communication.9-25

Assembly Object 04H

This object provides access to the devices via cyclic

communication. This object can be used to send data

to the devices that do not support cyclic

communication.

9-26

Connection

Manager Object06H

This object is used for connection-type

communication.9-28

TCP/IP Interface

ObjectF5H

This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/

IP network interface. You can set an IP address,

subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.

9-30

Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34

Page 166: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-28

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for

communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of

Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to

the scanner.

Commands

• Command format

*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-

31) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).

Responses

• Response format

Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication

Item Description

Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).

Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Item Description

General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H

is returned when the command ends normally.

Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).

Service response

data

Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the

command.

Page 167: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-29

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Command processing order and error response

Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:

Supplement for object processing

• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service

data.

• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is

executed, ignoring Attribute ID.

• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),

"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.

• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size

is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is

returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is

executed, ignoring the excessive data.

Class ID check

Yes

No

Instance ID check

Yes

No

Service check

Yes

No

Attribute ID check

Executes supported service process

Yes

No

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status

Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status

Page 168: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-30

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Reading the attribute ID

Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID

Data Type

The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:

Reading the DL Object Table

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Instance ID

Attribute ID

Name Description Attribute Data Type

00H74H

(116)

Output

1

Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each

sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is set to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3 ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Item Description

(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.

(2) Attribute ID

Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.

(* The parameter number 500 is the calculation function (attribute

ID0381H(897).)

(3) Name Represents the attribute name.

(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of

parameters that can be set.

(5) Attribute

Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.

R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,

Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.

W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used

to write the attribute value.

(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.

Data Type DescriptionRange

Minimum Maximum

INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767

UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535

DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647

WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -

DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -

STRING

Character string

(2-byte length information +

1-byte array per character)

- -

Page 169: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-31

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This

object is unique to the DL-EP1.

Services

*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH)

connected to the DL-EP1.

*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID 90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.

DL Object (Class ID:67H)

Service Code Service Name Description

0EHParameter

read

Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"

(Page 5-52).

10HParameter

write

Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 5-53).

4BH*1 Operation

command

Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of

processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.

Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the

object.

refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service

4BH (operation command)" (Page 5-55). For examples of

using this service, refer to

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 5-54).

4CHBatch lock

setting*2

Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected

sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported

by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor

amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code

09H is returned as a response.

Setting 0: Not lock

Setting 1: Key lock

"Lock setting" (Page 5-32)

For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking

sensor amplifier operations" (Page 5-57).

* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch

the bank.

4DH

Acquisition of the

number of decimal

places *3

Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated

parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)

Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from

a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-58).

Page 170: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-32

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• Lock setting

Responses

The responses made when each service is used are as follows:

(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH

(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H

(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH

(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH

(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH

Setting Description

0 Does not execute lock.

1Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display

switching and [RESET] button).

GeneralStatus

Command TypeDescription

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

00H Normal end

05H The instance ID is out of range.

08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or

cannot be executed.

09H - - - - The written data is out of range.

0CH - - -

• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled

by cyclic communication.

• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.

Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation

command.

0EH - - - -

• An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that

cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the

unwritable status.

• The written data is out of range.

10H - - - -

An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that

cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the

unreadable status.

13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.

The defined data size is stored in the additional status.

14H - The attribute ID is out of range.

16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated

instance ID is not connected.

1FH

• This service is supported by the designated instance ID

but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.

(Additional status: C350H)

• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be

written into the parameter.

(Additional status: C351H)

• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional

status: C352H)

FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Page 171: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-33

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Attributes

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

00H

64H

(100)Status

Indicates the status of this unit and connected

sensor amplifier.

Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status

Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system

Bit14: Warning Status

Bit15: Error Status

R WORD

65H

(101)

Sensor Error

Status

Indicates the error status of the connected

senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the

corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned

to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

66H

(102)

Warning

Status(Unassigned) R WORD

67H

(103)Reserved for system

68H

(104)

Current

Value 0

Property

Indicates the status of current value 0 of each

amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",

“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit

corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

69H

(105)

Current

Value 1

Property

(Unassigned) R WORD

6AH

(106) to

6BH

(107)

Reserved for system

6CH

(108)

Error ID

Number

Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)R UINT

6DH

(109)Error Code

Indicates the error code that is happening.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

6EH

(110)

Warning ID

Number(Unassigned) R UINT

6FH

(111)

Warning

Code(Unassigned) R UINT

70H

(112) to

73H

(115)

Reserved for system

74H

(116)

Output1

(HIGH)

Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of

each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Page 172: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-34

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

00H

75H

(117)

Output2

(LOW)

Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of

each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

76H

(118)

Output3

(GO)

Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each

amplifier. When GO is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

77H

(119)

Output4

(edge check)

Indicates the status of HH output (output 4) *1 of

each amplifier. When HH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

78H

(120)

Output5

(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD

79H

(121) to

89H

(137)

Reserved for system

8AH

(138)

Current

Value 0

Invalid

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8BH

(139)

Current

Value 0

Under Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less

than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit

of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8CH

(140)

Current

Value 0

Over Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

higher than the upper limit of the detection range,

the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8DH

(141)

Current

Value 1

Invalid

(Unassigned) R WORD

8EH

(142)

Current

Value 1

Under Range

(Unassigned) R WORD

8FH

(143)

Current

Value 1 Over

Range

(Unassigned) R WORD

90H

(144)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 1)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 1.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 173: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-35

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

00H

91H

(145)

to 92H

(146)

:

93H

(147)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 4)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 4.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R WORD

94H

(148)

to 9EH

(158)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 1) to

(ID Number

15)

(Unassigned) R DINT

9FH

(159)Reserved for system

A0H

(160)

to AEH

(174)

Current

Value 1 (ID

Number 1) to

(ID Number

15)

(Unassigned) R DINT

AFH

(175)Reserved for system

B0H

(176)

Sensor

Status Mask

Setting

Set up the condition to determine if the sensor

error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error

(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS

LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or

warning occurs.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Not mask

1: Mask

R/W UINT

B1H

(177)

Sensor

Connected

Number

Indicates the number of connected sensor

amplifiers.

Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0)

R UINT

B2H

(178)

to C7H

(199)

Reserved for system

0300H

(768)

Error Code

(ID number

0)

Indicates the error code of ID number 0.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

0301H

(769)

to

0303H

(771)

:

0304H

(772)

Error Code

(ID number

4)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 4.

Parameter range:

0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)

R UINT

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 174: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-36

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current

Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 5-12).

00H

0305H

(773)

to

030FH

(783)

Error Code

(ID number

5) to (ID

number 15)

(Unassigned) R UINT

0310H

(784)

to

04FFH

(1279)

Reserved for system

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Reference

Page 175: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-37

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Attributes for IG Series

Designate the ID number (01H to 04H) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Group1

0320H

(800)

Group1

Entry count

Indicates the number of items (entries) that can

be set in Group 1.

Parameter range: 29

R DINT

0321H

(801)

Sensor

amplifier

error state*1

Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier.

Bit0 : Overcurrent error

Bit1 : EEPROM error

Bit2 : Head error

Bit3 : T/R reverse connection error

Bit4 : Receiver EEPROM error

Bit5 : Receiver error

Bit6 : Transmitter error

Bit7 : Transmitter laser error

Bit8 : Model mismatch error

Bit9 : Head error (standard waveform)

Bit10 : Standard waveform error 1-4

Bit11 : Communication error

Bit12 : Additional setting error

Bit13 : Calculation error

R DWORD

0322H

(802)

to

0323H

(803)

Reserved for system

0324H

(804)

Judgment /

Edge check

output*2

Indicates the judgement/edge check output.

Parameter range: 00H to 0FH

Bit0: HIGH judgement output

Bit1: LOW judgement output

Bit2: GO judgement output

Bit3: Edge check output

R DWORD

0325H

(805)P.V. value*3, *4, *5

Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value).

Parameter range:

-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)

R DINT

0326H

(806)R.V. value*4, *5

Indicates R.V. value.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

0327H

(807)

Peak hold

value*4, *5, *6 *29

Indicates the peak hold value.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

0328H

(808)

Bottom hold

value*4, *5, *6 *29

Indicates the bottom hold value.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

0329H

(809)

Calculation

value

(CALC value)

*4, *5, *7

Indicates the calculation value (CALC value).

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

032AH

(810)

Analog

output value*7, *8, *9

Indicates the analog output value.

Parameter range: -5.000 to +5,000R DINT

032BH

(811)

to

032CH

(812)

(Reserved for system)

Page 176: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-38

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group1

032DH

(813)

Number of

edges*10Indicates the number of edges.

Parameter range: 0 to 99R DINT

032EH

(814)

Optical axis

alignment

state

Indicates the optical axis alignment state.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Optical axis alignment NG

1: Optical axis alignment OK

R DINT

032FH

(815)

to

0332H

(818)

(Reserved for system)

0333H

(819)

Abnormal

setting*11

Indicates the abnormal setting.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Normal setting

1: Abnormal setting

R DINT

0334H

(820)(Reserved for system)

0335H

(821)

EEPROM

writing

result*12

Indicates the EEPROM writing result.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Writing

1: Normal end

2: Writing failure

R DINT

0336H

(822)

Zero shift

execution

result*13

Indicates the zero shift and zero shift reset

execution result.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Executing

1: Normal end

2: Execution impossible

R DINT

0337H

(823)

Reset

request

result

Indicates the reset request results.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Executing

1: Normal end

2: Execution impossible

R DINT

0338H

(824)

System

parameter

current

state*14

Indicates the system parameter current state.

Parameter range:

Main unit : 0 to 9 (initial value: 0)

Expansion unit : 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

0339H

(825)(Reserved for system)

033AH

(826)

Waveform

registration

result

Indicates the waveform registration result.

Parameter range: 0 to 7

0: Executing request

1: Normal end

2: Standard waveform error 1

3: Standard waveform error 2

4: Standard waveform error 3

5: Receiver EEPROM error

6: Standard waveform error 4

7: Errors other than the above

R DINT

033BH

(827)(Reserved for system)

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 177: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-39

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group1

033CH

(828)

Tolerance/

2point

turning

result*15

Indicates the tolerance/2point tuning result.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Executing request

1: Normal end

2: Execution impossible

R DINT

033DH

(829)

Calibration

execution

result*16

Indicates the calibration execution result.

Parameter range: 0 to 4

0: Executing

1: Normal end

2: Span value abnormal termination

3: Offset abnormal termination

4: Span value/Offset value abnormal

R DINT

033EH

(830)

to

033FH

(831)

(Reserved for system)

Group2

0340H

(832)

Group2 Entry

count

Indicates the group 2 entry count.

Parameter range: 24R DINT

0341H

(833)

HIGH

setting value

(BANK 0)*17

Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 0).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000)

R/W DINT

0342H

(834)

LOW

setting value

(BANK 0)*17

Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 0).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0343H

(835)

Shift

target value

(BANK 0)*17

Indicates the shift target value (BANK 0).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

0344H

(836)

Sensitivity

setting (BANK

0)

Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 0).

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1)

0: Low sensitivity mode

1: Standard mode

2: High sensitivity mode

3: User

R/W DINT

0345H

(837)

User binarize

level

(BANK 0)

Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 0).

Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)R/W DINT

0346H

(838)

User filter

value

(BANK 0)

Indicates the user filter value (BANK 0).

Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)R/W DINT

0347H

(839)

HIGH

setting value

(BANK 1)*17

Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 1).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000)

R/W DINT

0348H

(840)

LOW

setting value

(BANK 1)*17

Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 1).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0349H

(841)

Shift

target value

(BANK 1)*17

Indicates the shift target value (BANK 1).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 178: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-40

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group2

034AH

(842)

Sensitivity

setting

(BANK 1)

Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 1).

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1)

0: Low sensitivity mode

1: Standard mode

2: High sensitivity mode

3: User

R/W DINT

034BH

(843)

User binarize

level

(BANK 1)

Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 1).

Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)R/W DINT

034CH

(844)

User filter

value

(BANK 1)

Indicates the user filter value (BANK 1).

Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)R/W DINT

034DH

(845)

HIGH

setting value

(BANK 2)*17

Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 2).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000)

R/W DINT

034EH

(846)

LOW

setting value

(BANK 2)*17

Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 2).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

034FH

(847)

Shift

target value

(BANK 2)*17

Indicates the shift target value (BANK 2).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

0350H

(848)

Sensitivity

setting

(BANK 2)

Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 2).

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1)

0: Low sensitivity mode

1: Standard mode

2: High sensitivity mode

3: User

R/W DINT

0351H

(849)

User binarize

level (BANK

2)

Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 2).

Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)R/W DINT

0352H

(850)

User filter

value

(BANK 2)

Indicates the user filter value (BANK 2).

Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)R/W DINT

0353H

(851)

HIGH

setting value

(BANK 3)*17

Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 3).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000)

R/W DINT

0354H

(852)

LOW

setting value

(BANK 3)*17

Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 3).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0355H

(853)

Shift

target value

(BANK 3)*17

Indicates the shift target value (BANK 3).

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value:0.000)

R/W DINT

0356H

(854)

Sensitivity

setting

(BANK 3)

Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 3).

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1)

0: Low sensitivity mode

1: Standard mode

2: High sensitivity mode

3: User

R/W DINT

0357H

(855)

User binarize

level

(BANK 3)

Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 3).

Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 179: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-41

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group2

0358H

(856)

User filter

value

(BANK 3)

Indicates the user filter value (BANK 3).

Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)R/W DINT

0359H

(857)

to

035FH

(863)

(Reserved for system)

Group3

0360H

(864)

Group3 Entry

count

Indicates the group 3 entry count.

Parameter range: 31R DINT

0361H

(865)Key lock

Indicates the key lock.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Not key locked state

1: Key locked state

R/W DINT

0362H

(866)Bank function*18

Reads the currently operating bank.

Parameter range:

0 to 3 (currently operating bank)

R DINT

Rewrites the operating bank.

Parameter range: 0 to 3

0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0.

1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1.

2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2.

3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3.

W DINT

0363H

(867)

Timing input

request*19, *20

Indicates the timing input request.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Timing input OFF

1: Timing input ON

R/W DINT

0364H

(868)

(Laser

emission stop

request*19, *20

Indicates the laser emission stop request.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Laser emission

1: Laser emission stop

R/W DINT

0365H

(869)

to

0367H

(863)

(Reserved for system)

0368H

(872)

Sub display's

screen*21

Indicates the sub display's screen.

Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0)

0: R.V. value screen

1: Analog output screen

2: HIGH setting value screen

3: LOW setting value screen

4: Shift target value screen

5: Calculated value display screen

R/W DINT

0369H

(873)

System

parameter*14, *22

Indicates the system parameter.

Parameter range:

Main unit : 0 to 9 (initial value: 0)

Expansion unit : 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

R/W DINT

036AH

(874)

Tolerance

setting

width*23

Indicates the tolerance setting width.

Parameter range:

0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100)

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 180: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-42

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group3

036BH

(875)

Calibration

function

Indicates the calibration function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Standard

1: User setting

R/W DINT

036CH

(876)

Calibration

function

SET1

Indicates the calibration function SET1.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

036DH

(877)

Calibration

function

SET2

Indicates the calibration function SET2.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 5,000)

R/W DINT

036EH

(878) to

0373H

(883)

(Reserved for system)

0374H

(884)

Edge

number 1

(BANK 0)*24

Indicates specified edges interval measurement

mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 0).

Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1)

R/W DINT

0375H

(885)

Edge

number 2

(BANK 0)*24

Indicates specified edges interval measurement

mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 0).

Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)

R/W DINT

0376H

(886)

Number of

the pins

(BANK 0)

Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin

diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins

(BANK 0).

Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2)

R/W DINT

0377H

(887)

Edge

number 1

(BANK 1)*24

Indicates specified edges interval measurement

mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 1).

Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1)

R/W DINT

0378H

(888)

Edge

number 2

(BANK 1)*24

Indicates specified edges interval measurement

mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 1).

Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)

R/W DINT

0379H

(889)

Number of the

pins

(BANK 1)

Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin

diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins

(BANK 1).

Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2)

R/W DINT

037AH

(890)

Edge

number 1

(BANK 2)*24

Indicates specified edges interval measurement

mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 2).

Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1)

R/W DINT

037BH

(891)

Edge

number 2

(BANK 2)*24

Indicates specified edges interval measurement

mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 2).

Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)

R/W DINT

037CH

(892)

Number of the

pins

(BANK 2)

Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin

diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins

(BANK 2).

Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2)

R/W DINT

037DH

(893)

Edge

number 1

(BANK 3)*24

Indicates specified edges interval measurement

mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 3).

Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1)

R/W DINT

037EH

(894)

Edge

number 2

(BANK 3)*24

Indicates specified edges interval measurement

mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 3).

Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 181: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-43

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group3037FH

(895)

Number of the

pins

(BANK 3)

Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin

diameter judgment mode:

Number of the pins (BANK 3).

Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2)

R/W DINT

Group4

0380H

(896)

Group4 Entry

count

Indicates the group 4 entry count.

Parameter range: 31R DINT

0381H

(897)

Calculation

function*7

Indicates the calculation function.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)

0: 0: Not use.

1: Addition mode

2: Subtraction mode

3: 2 heads mode

R/W DINT

0382H

(898)

Measurement

mode

Indicates measurement mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 7 (initial value: 0)

0: Edge control/positioning

1: Outer diameter/width

2: Inner diameter/opening

3: Glass edge

4: Pin position

5: Pin interval

6: Pin diameter

7: Specified edges interval

R/W DINT

0383H

(899)

Measurement

direction

Indicates the measurement direction.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Top

1: Bottom

R/W DINT

0384H

(900)(Reserved for system)

0385H

(901) Averaging*25

Indicates averaging.

Parameter range: 0 to 13 (initial value: 5)

0: hsp

1: 1

2: 2

3: 4

4: 8

5: 16

6: 32

7: 64

8: 128

9: 256

10: 512

11: 1024

12: 2048

13: 4096

R/W DINT

0386H

(902)Output mode

Indicates output mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: N.O.

1: N.C.

R/W DINT

0387H

(903)(Reserved for system)

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 182: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-44

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group4

0388H

(904)

Hold

function

setting

Indicates the hold function setting.

Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0)

0: Sample hold

1: Peak hold

2: Bottom hold

3: Peak-to-peak hold

4: Auto peak hold

5: Auto bottom hold

R/W DINT

0389H

(905)

Auto

hold

trigger

level

Indicates auto peak hold or auto bottom hold

trigger level.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100)

R/W DINT

038AH

(906)Timing input

Indicates timing input.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Level

1: Edge

R/W DINT

038BH

(907)Delay timer

Indicates the delay timer.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)

0: Delay timer off

1: On delay timer

2: Off delay timer

3: One shot timer

R/W DINT

038CH

(908)

Timer

value

Indicates the timing value. (The unit is ms.)

Parameter range: 1 to 9999 (initial value: 60)R/W DINT

038DH

(909) Hysteresis*23 Indicates the hysteresis.

Parameter range: 0 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.020)R/W DINT

038EH

(910)

Analog

output

scalingg*7

Indicates the analog output scaling.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Initial state

1: Free range

R/W DINT

038FH

(911)

Analog

output upper

limit*7

Indicates the analog output upper limit.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 10,000)

R/W DINT

0390H

(912)

Analog

output lower

limit*7

Indicates the analog output lower limit.

Parameter range:

-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

0391H

(913)

External

input*26

Indicates external input.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Initial state

1: User setting

R/W DINT

0392H

(914)

External input

1*26

Indicates external input 1.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: Zero shift input

1: Bank A input

2: Bank B input

3: Laser emission stop input

4: Not use

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 183: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-45

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group4

0393H

(915)

External input

2*26

Indicates external input 2.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: Reset input

1: Bank A input

2: Bank B input

3: Laser emission stop input

4: Not use

R/W DINT

0394H

(916)

External input

3*26

Indicates external input 3.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: Timing input

1: Bank A input

2: Bank B input

3: Laser emission stop input

4: Not use

R/W DINT

0395H

(917)

External input

4*26

Indicates external input 4.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 4)

0: Gain input (standard waveform input)

1: Bank A input

2: Bank B input

3: Laser emission stop input

4: Not use

R/W DINT

0396H

(918)(Reserved for system)

0397H

(919)

Saving the

standard

waveform

Indicates saving the standard waveform

function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: ON

R/W DINT

0398H

(920)

Saving zero

shift value

function

Indicates the saving zero shift value function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: ON

R/W DINT

0399H

(921)

Interference

prevention*7

Indicates the interference prevention function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: ON

R/W DINT

039AH

(922)

Display

digit*27

Indicates the display digit.

Parameter range: 1 to 4 (initial value: 2)

1: 0.001

2: 0.01

3: 0.1

4: 1

R/W DINT

039BH

(923)

Power save

function

Indicates the power save function.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: Half

2: All

R/W DINT

039CH

(924)

Position

monitor

Indicates the position monitor.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)

0: Initial state

1: OK/NG display mode

2: Red OFF

3: OFF

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 184: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-46

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group4

039DH

(925)Display color

Indicates the display color.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: GO green

1: GO red

2: Always red

R/W DINT

039EH

(926)

Edge

check

function

Indicates the edge check function.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: Setting A

2: Setting B

R/W DINT

039FH

(927)

Edge

check func.

number of

edges

Indicates the edge check function number of

edges.

Parameter range: 0 to 99 (initial value: 1)

R/W DINT

Group5

03A0H

(928)

Group5

Entry count

Indicates the group 5 entry count.

Parameter range: 28R DINT

03A1H

(929)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 1

*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 1 or pin interval 1.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03A2H

(930)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 2*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 2 or pin interval 2.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03A3H

(931)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 3*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 3 or pin interval 3.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03A4H

(932)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 4*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 4 or pin interval 4.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03A5H

(933)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 5*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 5 or pin interval 5.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03A6H

(934)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 6*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 6 or pin interval 6.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03A7H

(935)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 7*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 7 or pin interval 7.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03A8H

(936)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 8*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 8 or pin interval 8.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03A9H

(937)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 9*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 9 or pin interval 9.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03AAH

(938)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 10*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 10 or pin interval

10.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 185: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-47

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group5

03ABH

(939)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 11*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 11 or pin interval

11.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

03ACH

(940)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 12*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 12 or pin interval

12.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

03ADH

(941)

P.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 13*4, *28

Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 13 or pin interval

13.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

03AEH

(942)

R.V. of pin

diameter 14*4, *28

Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value) of pin

diameter 14..

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

03AFH

(943)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 1*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 1 or pin interval 1.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B0H

(944)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 2*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 2 or pin interval 2.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B1H

(945)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 3*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 3 or pin interval 3.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B2H

(946)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 4*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 4 or pin interval 4.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B3H

(947)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 5*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 5 or pin interval 5.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B4H

(948)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 6*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 6 or pin interval 6.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B5H

(949)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 7*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 7 or pin interval 7.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B6H

(950)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 8*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 8 or pin interval 8.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B7H

(951)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 9*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 9 or pin interval 9.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03B8H

(952)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 10*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 10 or pin interval

10.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 186: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-48

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Group5

03B9H

(953)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 11*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 11 or pin interval

11.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

03BAH

(954)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 12*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 12 or pin interval

12.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

03BBH

(955)

R.V. of pin

diameter/

interval 13*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 13 or pin interval

13.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000

R DINT

03BCH

(956)

R.V. of pin

diameter

14*4, *28

Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 14.

Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT

03BDH

(957)

to

03BFH

(959)

(Reserved for system)

Group6

03C0H

(960)

Group6

Entry count

Indicates the group 6 entry count.

Parameter range: 11R DINT

03C1H

(961)Product code

Indicates the product code.

Parameter range:

Main unit : 4016

Expansion unit : 4017

R DINT

03C2H

(962)Revision

Indicates the revision.

Parameter range:0101H to FFFFH (initial value:

0101H)

R DINT

03C3H

(963)

T connector

sensor head

Indicates the T connector sensor head.

Parameter range: 0 to 9 (initial value: 0)

0: IG-028 transmitter

1: IG-010 transmitter

9: Detection impossible

R DINT

03C4H

(964)

R connector

sensor head

Indicates the R connector sensor head.

Parameter range: 0 to 9 (initial value: 0)

0: IG-028 transmitter

1: IG-010 transmitter

9: Detection impossible

R DINT

03C5H

(965)

to

03C7H

(967)

Reserved for system

03C8H

(968)

Product

name

Indicates the product name.

Main unit : "IG-1000/1500"

Expansion unit : "IG-1050/1550"

R STRING

03C9H

(969)

to

03D6H

(982)

Reserved for system

03D7H

(983)Series code

Indicates the series code.

Main unit : 4016

Expansion unit : 4017

R DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 187: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-49

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

*1 You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/

OFF status of each bit.

OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred.

Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to

"IG Series User's Manual".

*2 You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of

each bit.

*3 Use this attribute in combination with the comparator value property or

comparator value information (invalid/over/under).

*4 If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998.

If this value is Over Range, +99.999 is stored.

If this value is Under Range, -99.999 is stored.

If this value is Invalid "----", -99.998 is stored.

If this value is Error, +100,000 is stored.

*5 If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2

heads mode, the read range varies with -999.99 to +999.99.

*6 This attribute can be used only when the detection mode of the sensor

amplifier is peak-to-peak hold.

Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible

to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period.

*7 If this attribute is used in the expansion unit, a read error occurs.

*8 If the sensor amplifier is in Error Status, the analog voltage output becomes

+5.500 and the analog current output becomes +3.00.

*9 If the analog output is OFF in the main unit, a read error occurs.

*10 If the number of edges is greater than or equal to 100, 99 is read.

*11 If a write for which a combination of inhibited functions is set is executed,

abnormal setting (1) occurs. For details on each error, refer to "IG Series User's

Manual".

(Example) If settings for using the calculation function are changed when

measurement mode is pin interval or pin diameter

*12 The results of "initial reset request" and "system parameter set request" for the

operation command are also included in this item.

*13 The execution result for the lastly requested item of "zero shift execution

request" or "zero shift request execution request" is read.

Group6

03D8H

(984)Series version

Indicates the series version.

Parameter range: 1R DINT

03D9H

(985)Device type

Indicates the device type.

Parameter range: 0R DINT

03DAH

(986)

to

03DFH

(991)

Reserved for system

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 188: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-50

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

*14 You can check the system parameter of the sensor amplifier by reading

"system parameter current state". The system parameter sets a judgement

output, edge check output polarity, and analog output.

Designate the system parameter set when the operation command executes

"system parameter set request" as "system parameter".

A read or write value is designated by ON/OFF of each of the bits to be

converted to a binary number.

When the read data is "6":

"6" is converted to "0110" in binary representation.

For this reason, the sensor amplifier that read data is set to "NPN

output" and "analog output 1 to 5 V".

*15 Of "tolerance tuning request", "two-point tuning HIGH side 2nd poiont

confirmation", and "two-point tuning LOW side 2nd point confirmation" for the

operation command, the execution result for the lastly requested item is read.

*16 If calibration is executed when measurement mode is pin interval or pin

diameter, the calibration execution result becomes "span value/offset value

abnormal".

*17 If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2

heads mode, the read range varies with -999.99 to +999.99. Also, if calculation

function mode is changed to 2 heads mode from modes other than 2 heads

mode, these setting values change to 10 times.

*18 If the sensor amplifier is in the key locked state, data cannot be written. If an

attempt is made to write data, a write error occurs.

*19 If the monitor data/external input connection is already established in cyclic

communication, a write error occurs.

*20 This attribute operates as OFF only when timing input OFF(0) is written and

external input is OFF in wiring.

*21 If an attempt is made to write 1 or 5, a write error occurs in the expansion unit.

*22 This is reflected in operation when the system parameter set request is

executed.

*23 If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2

heads mode, the read range varies with 0.00 to 99.99.

*24 For -100, "bottom" is set. For +100, "top" is set.

If an attempt is made to write 0, a write error occurs.

Bit Setting

00: NPN output

1: PNP output

3, 2, 1

000: Analog output OFF

001: 0 to 5V

010: -5 to +5V

011: 1 to 5V

100: 4 to 20mA

(Fixed to 000 for expansion unit)

Reference

0110 0

Bits 3, 2, 1: 1 to 5 V Bit 0: NPN output

Page 189: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-51

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

*25 If "pin interval" or "pin diameter" is set as measurement mode, hsp(0) and

512(10) to 4096(13) cannot be written. If hsp(0) is written, 1(1) is written. If

512(10) to 4096(13) are written, 256(9) is written.

When using the calculation function, do not write any data to the expansion

unit 1. Changing averaging of the main unit that is using the calculation

function automatically changes averaging of the expansion unit 1.

*26 To reflect the written settings in the sensor amplifier, you must write user setting

(1) in "external input" or set external input setting to "user setting" in button

operation of the sensor amplifier.

*27 If the calculation function is set to 2 heads mode, the valid value range is 2 to 4

(if 1 is written, a setting error occurs).

*28 If measurement mode is pin interval, the pin interval is read. If measurement

mode is pin diameter, the pin diameter is read.

Pin diameter (interval) 1 represents the first pin diameter (interval) counted

from the top side.

If this data is read when measurement mode is other than pin interval or pin

diameter, a read error occurs.

*29 If this value is read during sample hold, a read error occurs.

Page 190: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-52

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 0EH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Using DL Object

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed

value).0EH

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".0324H(804)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

data

The settings of the read parameter are

returned.0000H

Page 191: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-53

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 5-33).

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 16H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).

10H

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".

0347H(839)

Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)

00H

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Page 192: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-54

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-31) and "Attributes"(Page 5-33).

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4BH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

Before executing the operation command, check that the sensor amplifiercan execute the operation command. You can check whether the sensoramplifier can execute the operation command from the read results ofattributes for IG Series (zero shift result, zero shift reset execution result,reset request result, system parameter current state, standard waveformrequest result, tolerance/2point tuning result, calibration execution result). Ifthe read results are normal end (1), it indicates that the sensor amplifiercan execute the operation command. Also, check that the executedoperation command ends normally.

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Point

Page 193: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-55

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)

The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation

command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.

The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.

Attribute ID Name Description

0301H(769)

Zero shift execution request

Executes zero shift.Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing zero shift restores the state before the zero shift function is used. If the shift state is retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving zero shift value function to ON.

0302H(770)

Zero shift reset execution request

Resets the zero shift value.

0303H(771)

Reset request Executes reset.

0305H(773)

Initial reset request

Initializes all the settings other than the calibration, standard waveform registration, and system parameters of the sensor amplifier.All parameters are stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) approx. 3 minutes after the initial reset request is executed. After the initial reset request has been executed, "EEPROM write result" of the attribute for IG Series becomes normal end (1).

0306H(774)

System parameter set request

Changes the contents of the system parameter (judgement output, edge check output polarity, and analog output) to the contents written in "system parameter" of the setting/status command parameter.Change the contents tailored to the connected devices and wiring. If the contents are changed by mistake, the devices connected to the sensor amplifier may go down.

039AH(778)

Standard waveform registration request

Registers the standard waveform.Turning off the sensor amplifier after registering the standard waveform restores the state before the standard waveform is registered. If the standard waveform registration is retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving standard waveform to ON.

030EH(782)

Tolerance tuning request

Executes tolerance tuning.Set the tolerance setting width using the attribute for IG Series "tolerance setting width".

Page 194: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-56

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• Commands

030FH(783)

Two-point tuning HIGH side 1st point confirmation operation request

Executes two-point tuning.For details on the two-point tuning execution procedure, refer to "IG Series User's Manual".

0310H(784)

Two-point tuning HIGH side 2nd point confirmation operation request (determine HIGH setting value.)

0311H(785)

Two-point tuning LOW side 1st point confirmation operation request

0312H(786)

Two-point tuning LOW side 2nd point confirmation operation request(determine LOW setting value)

0313H(787)

Calibration SET 1 confirmation operation request

Executes calibration.Set the R.V. value that you want to display using the attribute for IG Series "Calibration function SET1" or "Calibration function SET2". For details on the two-point tuning execution procedure, refer to "IG Series User's Manual".

0314H(788)

Calibration SET 2 confirmation operation request(Perform calibration.)

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"

(fixed value).4BH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number

(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H

Attribute ID

Designates the attribute ID to be designated

from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation

commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute

IDs supported by the instance service 4BH

(operation command)" (Page 5-55)

0301H(769)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Attribute ID Name Description

Page 195: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-57

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 5-33).

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected

to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4CH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Service Data

• Commands

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"

(fixed value).4CH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a

command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H

Attribute ID There is no data. -

Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H

Page 196: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-58

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

• If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to theDL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensoramplifier are not changed).

• If the device is key locked, message communication cannot switch thebank.

(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from

the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4DH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Point

Item Description Data Example

Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".

03A1H

(929)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Page 197: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-4 Message Communication

5-59

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 5-33).

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 14H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Page 198: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

5-60

MEMO

5

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IG S

erie

s

Page 199: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 6-1

6Communicating with

IB Series

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that

communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit

and a communication timing chart.

6-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 6-2

6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 6-3

6-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 6-5

6-4 Message Communication................................. 6-22

Page 200: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -6-2

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

6-1 What is EtherNet/IP?

EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The

specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).

Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-

Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).

Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial

Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used

together with the network.

Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a

communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which

opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the

"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and

receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which

sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.

Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according

to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to

be adjusted for data exchange.

Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and

responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications

which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and

writing adaptor settings.

What is EtherNet/IP?

Scanner

Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor

High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)

Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)

Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)

Page 201: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 6-3

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.

The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and

message EtherNet/IP communications.

The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

IN area

OUT area

Output

Current value

Error information

External input

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1

Sensor amplifier

Message communication

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

IN area

OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters

Cyclic communicationExternal input

Setting value

Cyclic communication

Overview of Communication Methods

Function of sensor amplifier

Communication Methods

Cyclic communication(Page 6-5)

Message Communication(Page 6-22)

Read status

Read output

Read current value

Execute external input

Change bank number

X

Rewrite setting value

Motion command

Read current value, setting, and

status

Read number of decimal places

Rewrite setting value

Lock all

Page 202: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

6-4

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Cyclic communication

This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set

RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the

sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without

ladder programs.

Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.

Message communication

Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a

punctuality like cyclic communication.

In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be

exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific

to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.

PLC EtherNet/IP scanner

RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*

RPI=5 (ms)*

RPI=10 (ms)*

Various EtherNet/IP adaptors

Ethernet

* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.

Point

Page 203: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 6-5

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

6-3 Cyclic communication

This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.

What is cyclic communication?

Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device

in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).

In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully

opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.

The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be

opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:

(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.

(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.

(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the

connection.

(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open

the connection.)

"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 6-21)

Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor

amplifier as follows:

To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not

support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use

"Message Communication" (Page 6-22).

(1) Request connection open

(3) Open connection

(2) Check compatibility

Output data

Data reflected in thescanner

Input data

The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

IN area

OUT area

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Reference

Page 204: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-6

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

(1) Set the connection to be used.

(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.

Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.

(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)

Cyclic communication can use the following functions:

(1) Read status

(2) Read output (Page 6-18)

Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, check output

(3) Read P.V. value (Page 6-19)

(4) Execute external input (Page 6-20)

Inputs that can be used: External input 1, external input 2, external input 3,

external input 4

Configuring Cyclic Communication

Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication

Page 205: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-7

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic

communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type

usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.

The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:

• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection

type supports both point-to-point and multicast.

• The details of each application type are as follows:

Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data

transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data

transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is

made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)

data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the

settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be

opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).

Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1

to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only

monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an

"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-

EP1).

(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,

set the Connection Type to Multicast.)

Usable Connections

NoConnection

NameInput/Output

Assembly Instance

Size(Byte)

RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)

Application Type

1

Monitor Data

And External

Input

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 ms

Exclusive

OwnerScanner to

DL-EP165H (101) 10

2Monitor Data

(Input Only)

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 msInput Only

Scanner to

DL-EP1FEH (254) 0

Reference

Page 206: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-8

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.

The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into

an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order

byte.

Example)

Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner IN area

Address 0Address 1

Address 167

Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Reference

16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41

16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43

12H 34H

56H 78H

High-order byte Low-order byte

High-order byte Low-order byte

56H43

78H42

12H41

34H40

32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51

12H51

34H50

56H49

78H48

12H 34H 56H 78H

Page 207: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-9

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H

This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.

For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 6-11).

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/

Current Value 1" (Page 6-12).

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Status

0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1

Error Status

1 Error StatusWarningStatus

Reserved for system

Sensor Error Status

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Sensor Warning Status

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0

Over Range

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0 Under Range

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0 Invalid

10 ID08 . . . . . ID01

11Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1

Over Range (Unassigned)

12 ID08 . . . . . ID01

13Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1 Under Range

(Unassigned)

14 ID08 . . . . . ID01

15Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1 Invalid

(Unassigned)

16 ID08 . . . . . ID01

17Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 1 (HIGH)

18 ID08 . . . . . ID01

19Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 2 (LOW)

20 ID08 . . . . . ID01

21Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 3 (GO)

22 ID08 . . . . . ID01

23Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 4 (Check output)

24 ID08 . . . . . ID01

25Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 5(Unassigned)

26 ID08 . . . . . ID01

27Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 208: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-10

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

External Input

Response 1 (External input 1)

28 ID08 . . . . . ID01

29Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 2 (External input 2)

30 ID08 . . . . . ID01

31Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 3 (External input 3)

32 ID08 . . . . . ID01

33Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 4 (External input 4)

34 ID08 . . . . . ID01

35Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 5(Unassigned)

36 ID08 . . . . . ID01

37Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Error ID Number

40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

41

Error Code42

Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)43

Warning ID Number

44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

45

Warning Code

46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

47

Current Value 0

(Comparator Value (P.V.))

48

ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49

50

51

: :

104

ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105

106

107

Current Value 1

(Unassigned)

108

ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109

110

111

: :

164

ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165

166

167

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Page 209: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-11

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Parameter List

Item Description

DL-EP1 Error

Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.

ON: An error occurred.

OFF: No error occurred.

Warning Status

The warning statuses of all the connected sensor amplifiers are output.

When ON, a value is stored in "Warning ID Number" and "Warning Code".

When OFF, 0 is stored in "Warning ID Number" and "Warning Code".

ON: A warning occurred in any of the connected sensor amplifiers.

OFF: No warning occurred in the connected sensor amplifiers.

Error Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor

amplifiers are output.

When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0

is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".

ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor

amplifiers.

OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.

Sensor Error Status

The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is

output.

ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

Sensor Warning

Status

The bit of target ID number of the sensor amplifier where the warning occurred

is output.

ON: A warning occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

OFF: No warning occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

Current Value n

Over Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is greater than the measurement upper limit.

OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is less than the measurement upper limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.)

Current Value n

Under Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less

than the measurement lower limit.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

greater than the measurement lower limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.)

Current Value n

Invalid

(n: 0 to 1)

The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

invalid.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

valid (normal).

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.)

Output n (n: 1 to 5)

The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target

ID number is output.

Output 1: HIGH output

Output 2: LOW output

Output 3: GO output

Output 4: Check output

Output 5: (Unassigned)

ON: Output n is output.

OFF: Output n is not output.

Page 210: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-12

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Current Value 0/Current Value 1

External Input

Response

n (n: 1 to 5)

An external input response is output when the corresponding external input

request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.

The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.

ON: The external input request was made (ON).

OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).

For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 6-19).

Error ID Number

If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and

the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID

number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs

in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest

priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

Error Code

If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is

stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor

amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

"Error code list" (Page 6-13)

Warning ID

Number

When "Warning Status" is ON, the ID number of the sensor amplifier where the

warning occurred is stored. If no warning has occurred, 0 is stored. If a warning

occurs in multiple IDs, the smallest ID number is stored. (Priority: 0>1> to > 4)

Warning Code

If "Warning Status" is ON, the warning code is stored. If no warning has

occurred, 0 is stored. If two or more warnings occur in one sensor amplifier, the

smallest warning code is stored.

Current Value n

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value

0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the

current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value

1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0

to 1) depend on the use conditions.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.)

"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 6-12)

Item Description

Name Model Conditions Function

Current Value 0Main unit/

expansion unit- Comparator value (P.V.)

Current Value 1Main unit/

expansion unit- (Unassigned)

Page 211: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-13

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Error code list

The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.

DL-EP1

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

0

0 No error - -

51Unassigned ID

error

The main unit assigned no ID

within 10 seconds after the

DL-EP1 had been started.

• Check if the number of

connected sensor

amplifiers exceeds the

maximum number of

sensor amplifiers that can

be connected to the main

unit.

"Connectable Sensor

Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)

• Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on

again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

52Start-time

communication error

Communication between

sensor amplifiers ended

abnormally before ID

assignment completion.

Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

53

Unsupported

sensor amplifier

connection error

A sensor amplifier not

supported by the DL-EP1 is

connected.

Check the model of the

connected sensor amplifier

and remove the sensor

amplifier if it is not supported

by the DL-EP1.

54 Mixed model error

Sensor amplifiers outside the

specifications have a mixed

connection.

Check if the models are

mixable.

"Mixed Connection of

Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)

55Start-time

communication error

ID number assignment is

successful but

communication failed during

the subsequent initial

communication.

Check the connection with

the sensor amplifiers and

then turn the power on again.

If this error cannot be

recovered, contact your

nearest KEYENCE office.

56Current limitation

error

The number of connected

sensor amplifiers exceeds

the allowable range.

Use sensor amplifiers within

the allowable range.

57

Communication

error between

sensor amplifiers

An error occurred during

communication between

sensor amplifiers.

Check if there is a noise

source around the DL-EP1.

If the sensor communication

indicator is flashing red, turn

the power on again.

70IP address

duplicate error

The IP address is the same

as another device.

Check the IP address

setting.

Page 212: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-14

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

0

100 System error The IP address is incorrect.

Contact your nearest

KEYENCE office.

101 System errorA default gateway setting

error occurred.

102 System error

An attempt to read data in

EEPROM such as the MAC

address has failed.

103 System errorAn attempt to start the

protocol stack has failed.

104 System errorAn attempt to access

FlashROM has failed.

150 System errorThe number of held IDs is

incorrect.

151 System errorThe number of sensors is

incorrect.

152 System error An initial read error occurred.

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

Page 213: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-15

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

IB Series

Warning code list

The following warning codes occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.

IB Series

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

01H to

04H

(Each

ID

number)

01H

Sensor amplifier

error 1 of each ID

number

Overcurrent error (ErC)

Refer to the IB Series User's

Manual.

02H

Sensor amplifier

error 2 of each ID

number

EEPROM error (ErE)

03H

Sensor amplifier

error 3 of each ID

number

Head error (transmitter/

receiver) (ErH/tr)

04H

Sensor amplifier

error 4 of each ID

numbe

T/R reverse connection error

(alternate flashing of ErH/tr

and ErH/rt)

05H

Sensor amplifier

error 5 of each ID

number

Transmitter internal error

(ErH/t. int)

06H

Sensor amplifier

error 6 of each ID

number

Receiver error (ErH/r)

07H

Sensor amplifier

error 7 of each ID

number

Transmitter error (ErH/t)

08H

Sensor amplifier

error 8 of each ID

number

Transmitter laser error (ErH/

LASEr)

09H

Sensor amplifier

error 9 of each ID

number

Model mismatch error

(ErH/RAnGE)

0AH

Sensor amplifier

error 10 of each ID

number

Ref. light quantity registration

error

(ErG/dArk, ErG/inF)

0BH

Sensor amplifier

error 11 of each ID

number

Adjust error

(Er.AdJ/dArk, Er.AdJ/ovEr,

Er.AdJ/inF)

0CH

Sensor amplifier

error 12 of each ID

number

Communication error

between sensor amplifiers

(Er.coM)

Warning ID

Number (HEX)

Code Description Cause Actions

01H to 04H(Each ID number)

01H

Sensor amplifier

warning 1 of each

ID number

Check output stateRefer to the IB Series User's

Manual.

Page 214: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-16

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP

scanner.

External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H

* External inputs 1 to 4 are assigned any function and used. For details on the

functions to be assigned, refer to "IB User's Manual".

Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner's OUT area

Address 0Address 1

Address 9

External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

External

Input

Request 1

(External

Input 1)

0 ID08 . . . . . ID01

1Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 2

(External

Input 2)

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 3

(External

Input 3)

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 4

(External

Input 4)

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 5

(Unassigned)

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 215: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-17

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Parameter List

Name Function Operation

External

Input

Request 1

External input 1

ON: Turns on timing external input 1. Turning on external input 1

also turns on external input response 1.

OFF: Turns off external input 1. Turning off external input 1 also

turns off external input response 1.

External

Input

Request 2

External input 2

ON: Turns on timing external input 2. Turning on external input 2

also turns on external input response 2.

OFF: Turns off external input 2. Turning off external input 2 also

turns off external input response 2.

External

Input

Request 3

External input 3

ON: Turns on timing external input 3. Turning on external input 3

also turns on external input response 3.

OFF: Turns off external input 3. Turning off external input 3 also

turns off external input response 3.

External

Input

Request 4

External input 4

ON: Turns on timing external input 4. Turning on external input 4

also turns on external input response 4.

OFF: Turns off external input 4. Turning off external input 4 also

turns off external input response 4.

External

Input

Request 5

(Unassigned) (Unassigned)

Page 216: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-18

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1

(cyclic communication).

"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-18)

"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-19)

"Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 6-20)

For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"

(Page 6-4).

Reading an output from a sensor amplifier

Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, and check output

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 6-9)

This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic

communication.

Communication Methods

PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0

Sensor amplifier (1)Output

HIGH output of ID 01

10

ONOFF

Page 217: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-19

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier

Available external inputs: External input 1, External input 2, External input 3, External

input 4

Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance

(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 6-16)

This example shows how to enter external input 2 to the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was

assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor

amplifier is turned on or off.

(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input

response.

• If the external input or sensor amplifier input signal line from cycliccommunication is ON, the sensor amplifier recognizes that the externalinput is ON and executes input operation (OR operation). For example, ifthe external input or sensor amplifier input signal line from cycliccommunication is ON when laser transmission stop input is assigned toexternal input n, laser transmission stop input is executed.

• To use bank switching, set "bank switching method" to "external inputswitching".

PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [2]Bit0

(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0

Sensor amplifierExternal InputExternal input 2 to ID 01

10

ONOFF

10

Point

Page 218: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-20

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers

Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of

each sensor amplifier is assigned.

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 6-9)

This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers

ID01, ID02, and ID03.

(1)When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator

value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.

* If the value is correct and measurement mode is % mode, the parameter range

is -999.97 to +999.98. If the value is correct and measurement mode is

dimension mode, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998.

If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is

retained without updating the current value.

(2)The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of

IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current

Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a

sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID

number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1.

* For the IB Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.

PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]

Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

IN area [48 to 51]

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

IN area [52 to 55]

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

IN area [56 to 59]

Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

(1)

Page 219: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-3 Cyclic communication

6-21

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the

DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1

to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a

connection is opened.

When using scanners of other manufacturers

For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each

scanner.

Checking the Device Compatibility

Page 220: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -6-22

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

6-4 Message Communication

This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.

What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?

Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing

commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each

EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not

require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor

settings.

The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication

include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the

device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,

to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.

The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined

UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.

Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

Send

Receive

Receive

Send

(1) Message communication command

(3) Message communication response

(2) Interpret and execute command

Reference

Page 221: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-23

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and

send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"

(Page 6-26)

Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable

commands.

The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication

when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-53)

Configuring Message Communication

Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication

IB

Command

Response:1235

IB Comparator values (P. V. values): 1235

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)

Page 222: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-24

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-54)

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DL-

EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-55)

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1.

* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank.

"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 6-59)

IB

Command:500

Response

IB auto hold trigger level: 100→500

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0389H(905)Service data: 500

IB

Command

Response

External input 1execution by IB

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0301H(769)

IB

Command

Response

Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H

Page 223: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-25

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read

from the sensor amplifier.

"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier" (Page 6-60)

For the IB Series, if measurement mode is "% mode" and the current value

is 12.50%, data is stored as follows:

Data: 1250

Number of decimal places: 2

Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.

IB

Command

Response

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)

Reads the number of decimal places of the IB comparator value (P.V. value).

Reference

1250 12.50 12.5%Number of decimal places

2 1

Page 224: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-26

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.

Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter

change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal

places (5), etc.

Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor

amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the

comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it

possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers

corresponding to the respective instances.

Objects and Services

Parameter change(3)

Operation command execution(4)

Read of the number of decimal places(5)

DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1

Object(1)

(2)

Service

Data output

ID: 0324H Output

Attribute

ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate)

ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value)

DL Object(Class ID: 67H)

DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H

ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H

ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H

:

:

Page 225: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-27

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to

express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects

abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a

group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same

type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a

class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each

uses a unique attribute value.

• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.

The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A

command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance

ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the

command also requires a setting (service data).

* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.

"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"

(Page 6-29)

Reference

Command Response

・Service

・Class ID

・Instance ID

・Attribute ID*

・Service data*

・General Status

・Additional Status*

・Service response data*

Page 226: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-28

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.

Objects Usable by DL-EP1

Command

Response

DLObject

MessageRouterObject

ConnectionManagerObject

AssemblyObject

IdentityObject

TCP/IPInterfaceObject

EthernetLink

Object

EtherNet/IP unit

Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage

DL Object 67H

This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and

the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and

writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to

the DL-EP1.

6-32

Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,

general information and a reset service, etc.9-22

Message Router

Object02H

This object provides connection points for message

communication.9-25

Assembly Object 04H

This object provides access to the devices via cyclic

communication. This object can be used to send data

to the devices that do not support cyclic

communication.

9-26

Connection

Manager Object06H

This object is used for connection-type

communication.9-28

TCP/IP Interface

ObjectF5H

This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/

IP network interface. You can set an IP address,

subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.

9-30

Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34

Page 227: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-29

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for

communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of

Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to

the scanner.

Commands

• Command format

*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-

32) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).

Responses

• Response format

Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication

Item Description

Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).

Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Item Description

General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H

is returned when the command ends normally.

Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).

Service response

data

Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the

command.

Page 228: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-30

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Command processing order and error response

Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:

Supplement for object processing

• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service

data.

• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is

executed, ignoring Attribute ID.

• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),

"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.

• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size

is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is

returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is

executed, ignoring the excessive data.

Class ID check

Yes

No

Instance ID check

Yes

No

Service check

Yes

No

Attribute ID check

Executes supported service process

Yes

No

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status

Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status

Page 229: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-31

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Reading the attribute ID

Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID

Data Type

The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:

Reading the DL Object Table

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Instance ID

Attribute ID

Name Description Attribute Data Type

00H74H

(116)

Output

1

Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each

sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is set to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Item Description

(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.

(2) Attribute ID

Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.

(* The parameter number 500 is the calculation function (attribute ID0381H

(897).)

(3) Name Represents the attribute name.

(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of

parameters that can be set.

(5) Attribute

Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.

R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,

Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.

W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used

to write the attribute value.

(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.

Data Type DescriptionRange

Minimum Maximum

INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767

UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535

DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647

WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -

DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -

STRING

Character string

(2-byte length information +

1-byte array per character)

- -

Page 230: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-32

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This

object is unique to the DL-EP1.

Services

*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).

*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH) connected to the DL-EP1.

*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID 90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.

DL Object (Class ID:67H)

Service Code Service Name Description

0EHParameter

read

Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"

(Page 6-53).

10HParameter

write

Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 6-54).

4BH*1 Operation

command

Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of

processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.

Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the

object.

Refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service

4BH (operation command)" (Page 6-55). For examples of

using this service, refer to "(3) Issuing operation

commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-55).

4CHBatch lock

setting*2

Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected

sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported

by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor

amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code

09H is returned as a response.

Setting 0: Not lock

Setting 1: Key lock

"Lock setting" (Page 6-33)

For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking

sensor amplifier operations" (Page 6-59).

4DH

Acquisition of the

number of decimal

places *3

Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated

parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)

Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from

a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-60).

Page 231: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-33

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

• Lock setting

Responses

The responses made when each service is used are as follows:

(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH

(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H

(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH

(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH

(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH

Setting Description

0 Does not execute lock.

1Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display

switching and [RESET] button).

GeneralStatus

Command TypeDescription

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

00H Normal end

05H The instance ID is out of range.

08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or

cannot be executed.

09H - - - - The written data is out of range.

0CH - - -

• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled

by cyclic communication.

• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.

Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation

command.

0EH - - - -

An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that

cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the unwritable

status.

10H - - - -

An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that

cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the

unreadable status.

13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.

The defined data size is stored in the additional status.

14H - The attribute ID is out of range.

16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated

instance ID is not connected.

1FH

• This service is supported by the designated instance ID

but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.

(Additional status: C350H)

• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be

written into the parameter.

(Additional status: C351H)

• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional

status: C352H)

FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Page 232: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-34

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Attributes

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

00H

64H

(100)Status

Indicates the status of this unit and connected

sensor amplifier.

Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status

Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system

Bit14: Warning Status

Bit15: Error Status

R WORD

65H

(101)

Sensor Error

Status

Indicates the error status of the connected

senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the

corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned

to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

66H

(102)

Warning

Status

Indicates the warning status of each sensor

amplifier. If a warning occurs, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is set to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

67H

(103)Reserved for system

68H

(104)

Current

Value 0

Property

Indicates the status of current value 0 of each

amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",

“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit

corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

69H

(105)

Current

Value 1

Property

(Unassigned) R WORD

6AH

(106) to

6BH

(107)

Reserved for system

6CH

(108)

Error ID

Number

Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.

Parameter range: 0 to 4R UINT

6DH

(109)Error Code

Indicates the error code that is happening.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535R UINT

6EH

(110)

Warning ID

Number

Indicates the ID number of the device where the

warning occurred.

Parameter range: 0 to 4

R UINT

6FH

(111)

Warning

Code

Indicates the warning code that has occurred.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535R UINT

70H

(112) to

73H

(115)

Reserved for system

74H

(116)

Output1

(HIGH)

Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of

each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Page 233: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-35

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

00H

75H

(117)

Output2

(LOW)

Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of

each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

76H

(118)

Output3

(GO)

Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each

amplifier. When GO is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

77H

(119)

Output4

(Check

Output)

Indicates the check output (output 4) status of

each sensor amplifier. When HH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

78H

(120)

Output5

(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD

79H

(121) to

89H

(137)

Reserved for system

8AH

(138)

Current

Value 0

Invalid

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8BH

(139)

Current

Value 0

Under Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less

than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit

of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8CH

(140)

Current

Value 0

Over Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

higher than the upper limit of the detection range,

the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4

Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8DH

(141)

Current

Value 1

Invalid

(Unassigned) R WORD

8EH

(142)

Current

Value 1

Under Range

(Unassigned) R WORD

8FH

(143)

Current

Value 1 Over

Range

(Unassigned) R WORD

90H

(144)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 1)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 1.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647

R DINT

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 234: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-36

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

00H

91H

(145)

to 92H

(146)

:

93H

(147)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 4)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 4.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647

R WORD

94H

(148)

to 9EH

(158)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 5) to

(ID Number

15)

(Unassigned) R DINT

9FH

(159)Reserved for system

A0H

(160)

to AEH

(174)

Current

Value 1 (ID

Number 1) to

(ID Number

15)

(Unassigned) R DINT

AFH

(175)Reserved for system

B0H

(176)

Sensor

Status Mask

Setting

Set up the condition to determine if the sensor

error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error

(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS

LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or

warning occurs.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Not mask

1: Mask

R/W UINT

B1H

(177)

Sensor

Connected

Number

Indicates the number of connected sensor

amplifiers.

Parameter range: 0 to 4

R UINT

B2H

(178)

to C7H

(199)

Reserved for system

0300H

(768)

Error Code

(ID number

0)

Indicates the error code of ID number 0.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 R UINT

0301H

(769)

to

0303H

(771)

:

0304H

(772)

Error Code

(ID number

4)

Indicates the error code of ID number 4.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535R UINT

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 235: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-37

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current

Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 6-12).

00H

0305H

(773)

to

030FH

(783)

Error Code

(ID number

5) to (ID

number 15)

(Unassigned) R UINT

0310H

(784)

to

04FFH

(1279)

Reserved for system

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Reference

Page 236: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-38

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Attributes for IB Series

Designate the ID number (01H to 04H) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.

If the parameter range is data with a decimal point, read or write the data as aninteger, ignoring the decimal point. For example, if you want to write +1.235(dimension mode) in HIGH setting value (BANK0), write +1235.

Class Attribute ID

Name Description Attribute Data Type

Group1

0320H

(800)

Group1

Entry count

Indicates the group 1 entry count.

Parameter range: 29R DINT

0321H

(801)Error status *1

Reads the error status.

If an error occurs, the corresponding bit is set to

ON.

Bit 0: Overcurrent error (ErC)

Bit 1: EEPROM error (ErE)

Bit 2: Head error (transmitter/receiver)ErH/t r

Bit 3: T/R reverse connection error

(alternate flashing of ErH/rt and ErH/tr)

Bit 4: Transmitter internal error (ErH/t.int

Bit 5: Receiver error (ErH/r

Bit 6: Transmitter error (ErH/t

Bit 7: Transmitter laser error ErH/LASEr

Bit 8: Model mismatch error rH/rAnGE

Bit 9: Ref. light quantity registration error

(rG/dArK,ErG/inF)

Bit 10: Adjust error

(Er. AdJ/dArK, Er. AdJ/ovEr, Er. AdJ/inF)

Bit 11: Communication error between sensor

amplifiers Er.coM

R DWORD

0322H

(802)

Warning

Status

(Check

Output State)

Reads the warning status.

If a warning occurs, the corresponding bit is set

to ON.

Bit 0: 1 when the sensor amplifier is in the check

output state (check output is ON when

N.O. and OFF when N.C.)

R DWORD

0323H

(803)

Warning

function

operating

state (Check

Output

Function

Operation

Status)

Reads the warning function operation status.

If the warning function is in operation, the

corresponding bit is set to ON.

Bit 0: 1 when the check output function is ON

R DWORD

0324H

(804)

Judgement

output/Check

output

Reads the sensor output status.

If the output is ON, the corresponding bit is set to

ON.

Bit 0: HIGH

Bit 1: LOW

Bit 2: GO

Bit 3: Check output

R DWORD

0325H

(805)

Judgment

value (P.V.)*2

Read the comparator value (P.V.).

When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to

+999.99

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999

R DINT

Page 237: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-39

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group1

0326H(806)

Internal measurement

value (R.V.)*2

Read the R.V. value.When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999

R DINT

0327H(807)

Peak-hold value in hold

mode*2

• When the hold function is other than sampleholdReads the peak hold value during sampling.When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999

• When the hold function is sample holdWhen measurement mode is % mode: -999.98When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.998

R DINT

0328H(808)

Bottom-hold value in hold

mode*2

• When the hold function is other than sampleholdReads the bottom-hold value during sampling.When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999

• When the hold function is sample holdWhen measurement mode is % mode: -999.98When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.998

R DINT

0329H(809)

(Reserved for system)

032AH(810)

Analog output value

Reads the current analog output value. (Main unit only)Parameter range:Voltage: -5.000 to +5.000 (when an error occurs: +5.500)4 to 20 mA:+4.00 to +20.00 (when an error occurs: +3.00)OFF: Fixed at 0

R DINT

032BH(811)

Bank status

Reads the number of the currently operating bank.Check the number of bank where the sensor amplifier is actually operating from this attribute.Parameter range: 0 to 3

0: Bank 01: Bank 12: Bank 23: Bank 3

R DINT

032CH(812)

Timing status

Reads the timing status of the operating sensor amplifier.Check the timing status of the actually operating amplifier from this attribute.Parameter range: 0 to 10: Sampling now in progress1: Sampling not in progress

R DINT

032DH(813) to 0331H(817)

(Reserved for system)

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 238: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-40

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group1

0332H

(818)

Laser

emission

stop status

Reads the transmission stop status of the

actually operating sensor amplifier. Check the

transmission stop status of the actually operating

amplifier from this attribute.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Transmission now in progress

1: Transmission stop now in progress

(transmission stop input ON/laser errpr/head

error)

R DINT

0333H

(819)

Abnormal

setting*3

Reads the abnormal setting status.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Normal setting

1: Abnormal setting

R DINT

0334H

(820)

External

input status

Reads the external input setting status.

When the external input line of the sensor

amplifier or the external input of cyclic

communication is ON, the corresponding bit is

set to ON.

The external input operates even if "Not use" is

selected in External Input 1-4 Function Selection.

Bit 0: External input 1

Bit 1: External input 2

Bit 2: External input 3

Bit 3: External input 4

R DWORD

0335H

(821)

EEPROM

writing

result*4

Reads the EEPROM writing result.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Writing now

1: Normal end

2: Abnormal end

R DINT

0336H

(822)

Zero shift

execution

result*5

Reads the execution result of the zero shift or

zero shift reset.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Zero shift or zero shift reset execution now in

progress

1: Normal end

2: Abnormal end (SHiFt Err)

R DINT

0337H

(823)

Reset

execution

result

Reads the reset execution result.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Reset execution now in progress

1: Normal end

2: Abnormal end

R DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 239: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-41

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group1

0338H

(824)

System

parameter

current

state*6

Reads the system parameter current state.

Check the system parameter of the actually

operating amplifier from this attribute.

The bit corresponding to the current state is set

to ON.

Bit0:

0:NPN

1:PNP

Bits 1 to 3 (main unit only. The expansion unit is

fixed at 000.)

000: OFF

001: 0 to 5 V

010: -5 to 5 V

011: 1 to 5 V

100: 4 to 20 mA

R DINT

0339H

(825)(Reserved for system)

033AH

(826)

Ref. light

registration

result

Reads the Ref. light registration result.

Parameter range: 0 to 3

0: Ref. light registration now in progress

1: Normal end

2: Insufficient light reception error

3: Interfering light error

R DINT

033BH

(827)Adjust result

Reads the adjust/adjust reset execution result.

Parameter range: 0 to 4

0: Adjust/adjust reset execution now in progress

1: Normal end

2: Insufficient light quantity error

3: Interfering light error

4: Light quantity excess error

R DINT

033CH

(828)

Tuning

result*7

Reads the execution result of tolerance/two-point

tuning.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Tolerance/two-point tuning execution now in

progress

1: Normal end

2: Abnormal end

R DINT

033DH

(829)

Correction

result*8

Reads the execution result of measured

correction/theoretical correction.

Parameter range: 0 to 2

0: Measured correction/theoretical correction

execution now in progress

1: Normal end

2: Abnormal end

R DINT

033EH

(830) to

033FH

(831)

(Reserved for system)

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 240: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-42

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group2

0340H

(832)

Group2 Entry

count

Indicates the group 2 entry count.

Parameter range: 12R DINT

0341H

(833)

HIGH setting

value

(BANK 0)

Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 0).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0342H

(834)

LOW setting

value

(BANK 0)

Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 0).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000)

R/W DINT

0343H

(835)

Shift

target value

(BANK 0)

Sets the shift target value (BANK 0).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

0344H

(836)

HIGH setting

value

(BANK 1)

Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 1).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0345H

(837)

LOW setting

value

(BANK 1)

Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 1).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000)

R/W DINT

0346H

(838)

Shift

target value

(BANK 1)

Sets the shift target value (BANK 1).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

0347H

(839)

HIGH setting

value

(BANK 2)

Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 2).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

0348H

(840)

LOW setting

value

(BANK 2)

Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 2).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000)

R/W DINT

0349H

(841)

Shift

target value

(BANK 2)

Sets the shift target value (BANK 2).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 241: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-43

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group2

034AH

(842)

HIGH setting

value

(BANK 3)

Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 3).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000)

R/W DINT

034BH

(843)

LOW setting

value

(BANK 3)

Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 3).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000)

R/W DINT

034CH

(844)

Shift

target value

(BANK 3)

Sets the shift target value (BANK 3).

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

034DH

(845) to

035FH

(863)

(Reserved for system)

Group3

0360H

(864)

Group3 Entry

count

Indicates the group 3 entry count.

Parameter range: 20R DINT

0361H

(865)Key lock setting

Sets key lock.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Unlock

1: Key lock

R/W DINT

0362H

(866)Bank setting

Reads the current attribute.

Check the number of the bank where the sensor

amplifier is operating from the bank status

(032BH811)).

Parameter range: 0 to 3

R DINT

Changes the operating bank.

To change the bank number using this attribute, set

"bank switching method (0396H(918))" to "button".

For "external input", this attribute is invalid.

Parameter range: 0 to 3

0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0.

1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1.

2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2.

3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3.

W DINT

0363H

(867)Timing input*9

Sets the timing input.

Check the timing input status of the operating

sensor amplifier according to the timing status

(032CH(812)).

The sensor amplifier operates based on OR of

the external input line and cyclic communication.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Timing input OFF

1: Timing input ON

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 242: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-44

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group3

0364H

(868)

Laser

emission

stop input*9

Sets the laser emission stop input status.

Check the emission stop input status of the

operating sensor amplifier from the transmission

stop status (0332H(818)).

The sensor amplifier operates based on OR of

the external input line and cyclic communication.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Emission stop input OFF

1: Emission stop input ON

R/W DINT

0365H

(869) to

0367H

(871)

(Reserved for system)

0368H

(872)

Sub display's

screen

Sets the sub display's screen.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: r.v value

1: Analog value

2: HI setting value

3: LO setting value

4: Zero shift value

R/W DINT

0369H

(873)

System

parameter*6

Sets the system parameter.

Reflecting the system parameter setting requires

"system parameter set execution request

(0306H(774)) of the operation command after the

setting is written.

Check the system parameter of the operating

sensor amplifier from 0338(H824).

Bit0:

0:NPN

1:PNP

Bits 1 to 3 (main unit only. The expansion unit is

fixed at 000.)

000: OFF

001: 0 to 5 V

010: 5 to 5 V

011: -1 to 5 V

100: 4 to 20 mA

R/W DINT

036AH

(874)

Tol. tuning

setting width

Sets the tolerance setting width.

When measurement mode is % mode:

0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 10.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 1,000)

R/W DINT

036BH

(875)

Calibration

function*10, *11

Sets the correction method.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0: No correction

1: Measured correction

2: Theoretical correction (% mode only)

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 243: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-45

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group3

036CH

(876)

Meas./Logical

correct

target 1*10, *11, *12

Sets the 1st-point target value of the measured

correction or logical correction.

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (measured correction only)

(initial value: 0.000)

R/W DINT

036DH

(877)

Meas./Logical

correct

target 2*10, *11, *12

Sets the 2nd-point target value of the measured

correction or logical correction.

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (measured correction only)

(initial value: 10.000)

R/W DINT

036EH

(878) to

0372H

(882)

(Reserved for system)

0373H

(883)

Logical

correction

measured 1*11, *12

Sets the logical correction 1st-point

measurement value.

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

Unusable

R/W DINT

0374H

(884)

Logical

correction

measured 2*11, *12

Sets the logical correction 2nd-point

measurement value.

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

Unusable

R/W DINT

0375H

(885) to

037FH

(895)

(Reserved for system)

Group4

0380H

(896)

Group4

Entry count

Indicates the group 4 entry count.

Parameter range: 30R DINT

0381H

(897)(Reserved for system)

0382H

(898)

Measurement

mode15

Sets measurement mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: % mode

1: Dimension mode

R/W DINT

0383H

(899)

Received/

Blocked light

mode

Sets light entrance/light shading amount mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Light entrance amount display

1: Light shading amount display

R/W DINT

0384H

(900)(Reserved for system)

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 244: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-46

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group4

0385H

(901)

Averaging/

High-pass

filter

Sets the averaging/high-path filter.Parameter range: 0 to 19 (initial value: 5)

0 : 1 times

1 : Twice

2 : 4 times

3 : 8 times

4 : 16 times

5 : 64 times

6 : 256 times

7 : 1024 times

8 : 4096 times

9 : 16384 times

10 : 0.1Hz

11 : 0.2Hz

12 : 0.5Hz

13 : 1Hz

14 : 2Hz

15 : 5Hz

16 : 10Hz

17 : 20Hz

18 : 50Hz

19 : 100Hz

R/W DINT

0386H

(902)Output mode

Sets output mode.Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)0: N.O.1: N.C.

R/W DINT

0387H

(903)(Reserved for system)

0388H

(904)

Hold

function

setting

Sets the hold function.Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0)0: Sample hold1: Peak hold2: Bottom hold3: Peak-to-peak hold4: Auto peak hold5: Auto bottom hold

R/W DINT

0389H

(905)

Auto hold

trigger level

Sets the auto peak hold trigger level or auto bottom hold trigger level.When measurement mode is % mode:-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 90.00)When measurement mode is dimension mode:-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 9,000)

R/W DINT

038AH

(906)

Timing input

setting

Sets the timing input.Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)0: Level1: Edge

R/W DINT

038BH

(907)Delay timer

Sets the delay timer.Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)0: OFF1: On delay2: Off delay3: One shot

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 245: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-47

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group4

038CH

(908)

Timer

duration

Sets the timer duration.

Parameter range: 1 to 9999 (initial value: 60)

1 to 9999

R/W DINT

038DH

(909)Hysteresis

Sets the hysteresis.

When measurement mode is % mode:

0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 0.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

0 to 99.999 (initial value: 0)

R/W DINT

038EH

(910)

Analog

output

scaling*13

Sets the analog output scaling. (Main unit only)

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Initial state

1: Free range

R/W DINT

038FH

(911)

Analog

output upper

limit*13

Sets the analog output upper limit. (Main unit

only)

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 10,000)

R/W DINT

0390H

(912)

Analog

output lower

limit*13

Sets the analog output lower limit. (Main unit

only)

When measurement mode is % mode:

-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0)

R/W DINT

0391H

(913)

External

input setting *14

Sets whether to change external input 1 to 4

function assignment from the initial state.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Initial setting

1: User setting

R/W DINT

0392H

(914)

Ext. IN1

function

selection*14

Sets the function to be assigned to external input 1.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: Zero shift input

1: Bank A input

2: Bank B input

3: Laser emission stop input

4: Not use

R/W DINT

0393H

(915)

Ext. IN2

function

selection*14

Sets the function to be assigned to external input 2.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: Reset input

1: Bank A input

2: Bank B input

3: Laser emission stop input

4: Not use

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 246: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-48

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group4

0394H

(916)

Ext. IN3

function

selection*14

Sets the function to be assigned to external input 3.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)

0: Timing input

1: Bank A input

2: Bank B input

3: Laser emission stop input

4: Not use

R/W DINT

0395H

(917)

Ext. IN4

function

selection*14

Sets the function to be assigned to external input 4.

Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 4)

0: Adjust input

1: Bank A input

2: Bank B input

3: Laser emission stop input

4: Not use

R/W DINT

0396H

(918)

Bank

switching

method

Sets the bank switching method.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Button

1: External Input

R/W DINT

0397H

(919)(Reserved for system)

0398H

(920)

Save zero-

shift state

Sets whether to store the zero shift status.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0:OFF

1:ON

R/W DINT

0399H

(921)(Reserved for system)

039AH

(922)Display digit

Sets the display resolution.

When measurement mode is % mode:

0: Initial setting (dEFLt) (initial value)

1: (Reserved for system)

2: (Reserved for system)

3:0.01

4:0.1

5:1

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

0: Initial setting (dEFLt) (initial value)

1: (Reserved for system)

2:0.001

3:0.01

4:0.1

5:1

R/W DINT

039BH

(923)

Power

savefunction

Sets the power saving function.

Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)

0:OFF

1: Half

2: All

R/W DINT

039CH

(924)(Reserved for system)

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 247: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-49

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

Group4

039DH

(925)

Judgment

indicator

color

Sets the display colors of judgement output

indicators.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)

0: Only GO is green (initial status)

1: Only GO is red

2: All P.V. values are green

3: All P.V. values are red

R/W DINT

039EH

(926)

P.V. value

display color

Sets P.V. value display colors.

Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)

0: Green when GO (initial status)

1: Red when GO

2: All P.V. values are green

3: All P.V. values are red

R/W DINT

039FH

(927)(Reserved for system)

Group5

03A0H

(928)

Group5

Entry count

Indicates the group 5 entry count.

Parameter range: 9R DINT

03A1H

(929)

Save adjust

state

Sets whether to store the adjust status.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0:OFF

1:ON

R/W DINT

03A2H

(930)Adjust level

Sets an adjust level.

Parameter range: 1 to 30 (initial value: 20)R/W DINT

03A3H

(931)

Auto

adjust

function

Sets whether to enable the auto adjust function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Disable

1: Enable

R/W DINT

03A4H

(932)

Auto

adjust level

Sets an auto adjust level.

0.50 to 20.00 (initial value: 3.00)R/W DINT

03A5H

(933)

Check output

function

Sets whether to enable the check output

function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: OFF

1: ON

R/W DINT

03A6H

(934)

Check output

light level

Sets the light quantity level of the check output

function.

Parameter range: 1 to 30 (initial value: 10)

R/W DINT

03A7H

(935)

Error output

mode

Sets error output mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Normal mode (initial status)

1: Compatibility mode

R/W DINT

03A8H

(936)

Hysteresis

for trigger

level

Sets the trigger level hysteresis.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Initial state

1: User setting

R/W DINT

03A9H(937)

Hys. set value for trigger level

Sets the hysteresis setting value for trigger level.When measurement mode is % mode:0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 1.00)When measurement mode is dimension mode:0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100)

R/W DINT

03AAH (938) to 03BFH (959)

(Reserved for system)

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 248: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-50

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

*1 You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the

ON/OFF status of each bit.

OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred.

Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer

to "IB Series User's Manual".

Group6

03C0H(960)

Group6 Entry

count

Indicates the group 6 entry count.Parameter range: 11

R DINT

03C1H(961)

Product code

Indicates the product code.

Main unit: 4020

Expansion unit: 4021

R DINT

03C2H(962)

RevisionIndicates the revision.Parameter range: 0101H

R DINT

03C3H(963)

Transmission SideHead Model

Indicates the model of the head connected to the sensor head connector (transmission side).Parameter range: 0 to 40: No head is connected or the R head is connected.1: IB-012: IB-053: IB-104: IB-30

R DINT

03C4H(964)

Light Receiving SideHead Model

Indicates the model of the head connected to the sensor head connector (light receiving side).Parameter range: 0 to 40: No head is connected or the T head is connected.1: IB-012: IB-053: IB-104: IB-30

R DINT

03C5H (965) to 03C7H (967)

(Reserved for system)

03C8H(968)

Product

name

Indicates the sensor product name.Main unit: "IB-1000/1500"Expansion unit: "IB-1050/1550"

R STRING

03C9H (969) to 03D6H (982)

(Reserved for system)

03D7H(983)

Series codeIndicates the series code.Main unit: 4020Expansion unit: 4021

R DINT

03D8H

(984)

Series

version

Indicates the series version.

Parameter range: 1R DINT

03D9H(985)

Device typeIndicates the device type.Parameter range: 0

R DINT

03DAH (986) to 03DFH (991)

(Reserved for system)

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 249: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-51

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

*2 If the read data is any of the following, the meaning of this attribute differs

from the meaning of the comparator value.

When measurement mode is % mode:

+ 999.99: The value exceeds the upper limit of the display range.

-999.99: The value exceeds - 999.98 or the lower limit of the display range.

-999.98: The value is "-----" (comparator value invalid).

+1000.00: The sensor amplifier is in the error status.

When measurement mode is dimension mode:

+99.999: The value exceeds the upper limit of the display range.

-99.999: -99.998 or the lower limit of the display range.

-99.998: The value is "-----" (comparator value invalid).

+100,000: The sensor amplifier is in the error status.

*3 If a write for which a combination of inhibited functions is set is executed,

abnormal setting (1) occurs. For details on each function, refer to "IB Series

User's Manual".

*4 The results of "initial reset request" and "system parameter set request" for

the operation command are also included in this item.

*5 The execution result for the lastly requested item of "zero shift execution

request" or "zero shift request execution request" is read.

*6 You can check the system parameter of the sensor amplifier by reading

"system parameter current state". The system parameter sets a judgement

output, check output polarity, and analog output.

Designate the system parameter set when the operation command executes

"system parameter set request" as "system parameter".

A read or write value is designated by ON/OFF of each of the bits to be

converted to a binary number.

When the read data is "6":

"6" is converted to "0110" in binary representation.

For this reason, the sensor amplifier that read data is set to "NPN

output" and "analog output 1 to 5 V".

*7 Of "tolerance tuning request", "2-point tuning HIGH side 2nd", and "2-point

tuning LOW side 2nd" for the operation command, the execution result for

the lastly requested item is read.

Bit Setting

00: NPN output

1: PNP output

3, 2, 1

000: Analog output OFF

001: 0 to 5V

010: -5 to +5V

011: 1 to 5V

100: 4 to 20mA

(Fixed to 000 for expansion unit)

Reference

0110 0

Bits 3, 2, 1: 1 to 5 V Bit 0: NPN output

Page 250: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-52

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

*8 The execution result for the lastly requested item of "measured correction" or

"logical correction" is read.

In the following cases, the execution result becomes "2: Abnormal end".

• The setting value is out of the parameter range.

• The 2nd-point correction execution is requested without the 1st-point

correction execution requested.

• Correction execution is requested when calibration function setting is "0:

Initial setting".

• Logical correction execution is requested when calibration function is

setting is "1: Measured correction".

• Measured correction execution is requested when calibration function

setting is "2: Logical correction".

• Logical correction execution is requested when measurement mode is

dimension mode.

*9 This attribute operates as OFF only when input OFF(0) is written and external

input is OFF in wiring and cyclic communication.

*10 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to

"1. Measured correction".

When executing measured correction, set measured correction 1st-point

target value (036CH(876)) and measured correction 2nd-point target value

(036DH(877)) and then execute the measured correction execution request

(operation command , 0313(H787), 0314H(788)).

*11 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to

"2. Measured correction".

When executing theoretical correction, set theoretical correction 1st target

value (036CH(876)), theoretical correction 2nd target value (036DH(877)),

theoretical correction 1st measurement value (0373H(883)), and theoretical

correction 2nd measurement value (0374H(884)) and then execute the

theoretical correction execution request (operation command (031AH(794),

031BH(795)).

*12 Executing other settings in the middle of the 1st- or 2nd-point target or

measurement value makes it impossible to complete calibration setting. Be

sure to set the 1st- and 2nd-point target or measurement values

continuously.

*13 If an attempt is made to write data to the expansion unit, a write error occurs.

*14 To reflect the settings written in external input 1 to 4 function selection

(0392H(914) to 0395H(917)) in the sensor amplifier, you must set external

input setting (0391H(913)) to 1 (user setting) or set external input setting to

"user setting" in button operation of the sensor amplifier.

*15 When a write is executed, the data communication time between the DL-EP1

and sensor amplifier becomes approx. 1 second. "Data Processing Time"

(Page 8-3)

Page 251: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-53

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 0EH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Using DL Object

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed

value).0EH

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".0324H(804)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

data

The settings of the read parameter are

returned.0000H

Page 252: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-54

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-32) and "Attributes"

(Page 6-34).

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 16H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).

10H

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".

0347H(839)

Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)

00H

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Page 253: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-55

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-32) and "Attributes"(Page 6-34).

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4BH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

Before executing the operation command, check that the sensor amplifiercan execute the operation command. For details on the check method,refer to "IB Series User's Manual". Also, check that the executed operationcommand ends normally.

• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)

The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation

command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.

The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Attribute ID Name Description

0301H(769)

Zero shift request

Executes zero shift.

Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing zero shift restores the state before the zero shift function is used. If the shift state is retained

even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving zero shift value function to ON.

0302H(770)

Zero shift reset request Resets the zero shift value.

0303H(771)

Resets request Executes reset

Point

Page 254: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-56

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

0304H(772)

Error clear requestClears the ref. light quantity registration error [ErG] and adjust error [ErAdJ].

0305H

(773)Initial reset request

Initializes all the settings other than the

calibration, ref. light quantity registration, and system parameters of the sensor amplifier.All parameters are stored in nonvolatile

memory (EEPROM) approx. 3 minutes after the initial reset request is executed. After the initial reset request has been executed, "EEPROM

write result" of the attribute for IB Series becomes normal end (1).

0306H

(774)

System parameter set

request

Changes the contents of the system parameter (settings of judgement output, check output

polarity, and analog output) to the contents written in "system parameter" of the attribute for the IB Series.

When executing the system parameter set, change the contents tailored to the connected devices and wiring. If the contents are

changed by mistake, the devices connected to the sensor amplifier may go down.

030AH(778)

Ref. light registration request

Registers the ref. light quantity.

030BH(779)

Adjust request

Executes the adjust function.

Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing the adjust function restores the state before the adjust function is executed. If the adjust value is

retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the adjust status storage function to ON.

030CH(780)

Adjust reset request Initializes the adjust value.

030EH(782)

Tolerance tuning request

Executes tolerance tuning.

Set the tolerance setting width using the attribute for IB Series "tolerance setting width".

030FH

(783)

2-point tuning HIGH

side 1st req

Executes 2-point tuning.

For details on the two-point tuning execution procedure, refer to "IB Series User's Manual".

0310H(784)

2-point tuning HIGH side 2nd req (Determine HIGH

setting value.)

0311H(785)

2-point tuning LOW side 1st req

0312H

(786)

2-point tuning LOW side 2nd req

(Determine LOW setting value)

Attribute ID Name Description

Page 255: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-57

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

*2 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to "1.

Measured correction".

When executing measured correction, set measured correction 1st-point target

value (036CH(876)) and measured correction 2nd-point target value036DH(877))

and then execute the measured correction execution request (operation

command , 0313H(787)), 0314H788.

*3 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to "2.

Measured correction".

When executing logical correction, set logical correction 1st target value

(036CH(876)), logical correction 2nd target value (036DH(877)), logical

correction 1st measurement value (0373H(883)), and logical correction 2nd

measurement value (0374H(884)) and then execute the logical correction

execution request (operation command (031AH(794), 031BH(795)).

*4 Executing other settings in the middle of the 1st- or 2nd-point target or

measurement value makes it impossible to complete calibration setting. Be sure

to set the 1st- and 2nd-point target or measurement values continuously.

• Commands

0313H

(787)

Measured correction 1st req

(SET1 confirmationoperation)

Executes measured correction.Set the R.V. value that you want to display in

the attribute for the IB Series "Measured Correction/Theoretical Correction 1st Point Target Value" or "Measured Correction/

Theoretical Correction 2nd Point Target Value".For details on the measured correction execution procedure, refer to "IB Series User's

Manual".*2, *4

0314H(788)

Measured correction

2nd req(SET2 confirmationoperation)

031AH(794)

Logical correction 1st

req(SET1 confirmation operation)

Executes logical correction.

Set the R.V. value that you want to correct in the attribute for IB Series "logical correction 1st point measurement value" or "logical correction

2nd point measurement value".Set the R.V. value that you want to display in the attribute for the IB Series "Measured

Correction/Logical Correction 1st Point Target Value" or "Measured Correction/Theoretical

Correction 2nd Point Target Value".For details on the measured correction execution procedure, refer to "IB Series User's

Manual".*3, *4

031BH(795)

Logical correction 2nd

req(SET2 confirmation operation)

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"

(fixed value).4BH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Attribute ID Name Description

Page 256: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-58

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-32) and "Attributes"

(Page 6-34).

Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number

(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H

Attribute ID

Designates the attribute ID to be designated

from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation

commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute

IDs supported by the instance service 4BH

(operation command)" (Page 6-55)

0301H(769)

Service Data There is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

Page 257: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-59

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected

to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4CH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Service Data

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to the DL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensor amplifier arenot changed).

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"

(fixed value).4CH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a

command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H

Attribute ID There is no data. -

Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Point

Page 258: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

6-4 Message Communication

6-60

6

Co

mm

un

ica

ting

with

IB S

erie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from

the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4DH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-32) and "Attributes"

(Page 6-34).

Item Description Data Example

Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".

03A1H

(929)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 14H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Page 259: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7-1

7Communicating with

FD-MH Series

This chapter describes the configuration of memory that

communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit

and a communication timing chart.

7-1 What is EtherNet/IP?...........................................7-2

7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ....7-3

7-3 Cyclic communication..........................................7-5

7-4 Message Communication..................................7-21

Page 260: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -7-2

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

7-1 What is EtherNet/IP?

EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The

specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).

Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-

Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).

Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial

Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used

together with the network.

Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a

communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which

opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the

"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and

receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which

sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.

Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according

to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to

be adjusted for data exchange.

Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and

responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications

which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and

writing adaptor settings.

What is EtherNet/IP?

Scanner

Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor

High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)

Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)

Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)

Page 261: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7-3

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.

The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and

message EtherNet/IP communications.

The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

External input

Setting value

IN area

OUT area

Output

Current value

Error information

External input

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1

Sensor amplifier

Message communication

Output

Comparator Value

・・・・・・Error information

IN area

OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters

Cyclic communicationExternal input

Setting value

Cyclic communication

Overview of Communication Methods

Function of sensor amplifier

Communication Methods

Cyclic communication(Page 7-5)

Message Communication(Page 7-21)

Read status

Read output

Read current value

Execute external input

Change bank number

X

Rewrite setting value

Motion command

Read current value, setting,

and status

Read number of decimal

places

Rewrite setting value

Lock all

Page 262: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function

7-4

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Cyclic communication

This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set

RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the

sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without

ladder programs.

Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.

Message communication

Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a

punctuality like cyclic communication.

In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be

exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific

to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.

PLC EtherNet/IP scanner

RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*

RPI=5 (ms)*

RPI=10 (ms)*

Various EtherNet/IP adaptors

Ethernet

* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.

Point

Page 263: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7-5

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

7-3 Cyclic communication

This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.

What is cyclic communication?

Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device

in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).

In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully

opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.

The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be

opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)

Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:

(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.

(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.

(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the

connection.

(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open

the connection.)

"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 7-20)

Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor

amplifier as follows:

To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not

support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use

"Message Communication" (Page 7-21).

(1) Request connection open

(3) Open connection

(2) Check compatibility

Output data

Data reflected in thescanner

Input data

The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.

EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

IN area

OUT area

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Cyclic communication

Data betweensensors isrefreshed

Reference

Page 264: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-6

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

(1) Set the connection to be used.

(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.

Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.

(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)

Cyclic communication can use the following functions:

(1) Read status

(2) Read output (Page 7-17)

Outputs that can be read: Output 1, output 2, output 3

(3) Read current value (instantaneous flow rate) (Page 7-18)

(4) Execute external input (Page 7-19)

Inputs that can be used: Integration reset, flow HOLD reset, temperature HOLD

reset

Configuring Cyclic Communication

Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication

Page 265: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-7

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic

communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type

usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.

The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:

• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection

type supports both point-to-point and multicast.

• The details of each application type are as follows:

Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data

transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data

transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is

made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)

data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the

settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be

opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).

Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1

to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only

monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an

"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-

EP1).

(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,

set the Connection Type to Multicast.

Usable Connections

NoConnection

NameInput/Output

Assembly Instance

Size(Byte)

RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)

Application Type

1

Monitor Data

And External

Input

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 ms

Exclusive

OwnerScanner to

DL-EP165H (101) 10

2Monitor Data

(Input Only)

DL-EP1 to

scanner64H (100) 168

0.5 ms to

10000 msInput Only

Scanner to

DL-EP1FEH (254) 0

Reference

Page 266: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-8

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.

The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into

an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order

byte.

Example)

Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner IN area

Address 0Address 1

Address 167

Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Reference

16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41

16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43

12H 34H

56H 78H

High-order byte Low-order byte

High-order byte Low-order byte

56H43

78H42

12H41

34H40

32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51

12H51

34H50

56H49

78H48

12H 34H 56H 78H

Page 267: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-9

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H

This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.

For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 7-11).

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/

Current Value 1" (Page 7-12).

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Status

0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1

Error Status

1 Error StatusWarningStatus

Reserved for system

SensorError

Status

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

SensorWarningStatus

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0

OverRange

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0UnderRange

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 0Invalid

10 ID08 . . . . . ID01

11Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1

OverRange

12 ID08 . . . . . ID01

13Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1UnderRange

14 ID08 . . . . . ID01

15Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Current Value 1Invalid

16 ID08 . . . . . ID01

17Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 1

18 ID08 . . . . . ID01

19Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 2

20 ID08 . . . . . ID01

21Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 3

22 ID08 . . . . . ID01

23Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 4(Unassigned)

24 ID08 . . . . . ID01

25Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Output 5(Unassigned)

26 ID08 . . . . . ID01

27Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 268: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-10

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

External Input

Response 1(Integration

reset)

28 ID08 . . . . . ID01

29Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 2(Flow HOLD

reset)

30 ID08 . . . . . ID01

31Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 3(Unassigned)

32 ID08 . . . . . ID01

33Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 4(Temperature HOLD reset)

34 ID08 . . . . . ID01

35Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External Input

Response 5(Unassigned)

36 ID08 . . . . . ID01

37Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

ErrorID Number

40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

41

ErrorCode

42Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

43

WarningID Number

44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)

45

Warning Code

46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)

47

Current Value 0

(Current value (Instantaneous

flow rate))

48

ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49

50

51

: :

104

ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105

106

107

Current Value 1

(Unassigned)

108

ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109

110

111

: :

164

ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165

166

167

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Page 269: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-11

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Parameter List

Item Description

DL-EP1 Error

Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.

ON: An error occurred.

OFF: No error occurred.

Warning Status (Unassigned)

Error Status

The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor

amplifiers are output.

When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0

is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".

ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor

amplifiers.

OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.

Sensor Error Status

The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is

output.

ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.

Sensor Warning

Status(Unassigned)

Current Value n

Over Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is greater than the measurement upper limit.

OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is less than the measurement upper limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.)

Current Value n

Under Range

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number

is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is

output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less

than the measurement lower limit.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

greater than the measurement lower limit.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.)

Current Value n

Invalid

(n: 0 to 1)

The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID

number is output.

ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

invalid.

OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is

valid (normal).

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.)

Output n (n: 1 to 5)

The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target

ID number is output.

Output 1: Output 1

Output 2: Output 2

Output 3: Output 3

Output 4: (Unassigned)

Output 5: (Unassigned)

ON: Output n is output.

OFF: Output n is not output.

External Input

Response

n (n: 1 to 5)

An external input response is output when the corresponding external input

request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.

The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.

ON: The external input request was made (ON).

OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).

For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 7-18).

Page 270: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-12

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Current Value 0/Current Value 1

Error ID Number

If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and

the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID

number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs

in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest

priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

Error Code

If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is

stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor

amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.

Error priority:

(1) DL-EP1 error

(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the

highest priority)*

* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error

with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.

"Error code list" (Page 7-13)

Warning ID

Number(Unassigned)

Warning Code (Unassigned)

Current Value n

(n: 0 to 1)

The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value

0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the

current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value

1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0

to 1) depend on the use conditions.

(* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.)

"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 7-12)

Item Description

Name Model Conditions Function

Current Value 0Main unit/

expansion unit-

Current value

(instantaneous flow rate)

Current Value 1Main unit/

expansion unit- (Unassigned)

Page 271: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-13

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Error code list

The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.

DL-EP1

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

0

0 No error - -

51Unassigned ID error

The main unit assigned no ID within 10 seconds after the DL-EP1 had been started.

• Check if the number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the maximum number of sensor amplifiers that can be connected to the main unit.

"Connectable Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)

• Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again.If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

52Start-time communication error

Communication between sensor amplifiers ended abnormally before ID assignment completion.

Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again.If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

53Unsupported sensor amplifier connection error

A sensor amplifier not supported by the DL-EP1 is connected.

Check the model of the connected sensor amplifier and remove the sensor amplifier if it is not supported by the DL-EP1.

54 Mixed model errorSensor amplifiers outside the specifications have a mixed connection.

Check if the models are mixable.

"Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)

55Start-time communication error

ID number assignment is successful but communication failed during the subsequent initial communication.

Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again.If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

56Current limitation error

The number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the allowable range.

Use sensor amplifiers within the allowable range.

57Communication error between sensor amplifiers

An error occurred during communication between sensor amplifiers.

Check if there is a noise source around the DL-EP1.If the sensor communication indicator is flashing red, turn the power on again.

70IP addressduplicate error

The IP address is the same as another device.

Check the IP address setting.

Page 272: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-14

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

FD-MH Series

0

100 System error The IP address is incorrect.

Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

101 System errorA default gateway setting error occurred.

102 System errorAn attempt to read data in EEPROM such as the MAC address has failed.

103 System errorAn attempt to start the protocol stack has failed.

104 System errorAn attempt to access FlashROM has failed.

150 System errorThe number of held IDs is incorrect.

151 System errorThe number of sensors is incorrect.

152 System error An initial read error occurred.

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

01H to 0BH(Each ID number)

01HSensor amplifier error 1 of each ID number

Head error (ErS)

Refer to the FD-MH Series User's Manual.

02HSensor amplifier error 2 of each ID number

Head connection error (ErH)

03HSensor amplifier error 3 of each ID number

Overcurrent error (ErC)

04HSensor amplifier error 4 of each ID numbe

EEPROM error (ErE)

05HSensor amplifier error 5 of each ID number The instantaneous flow rate

remains unchanged (dry water).

06HSensor amplifier error 6 of each ID number

07HSensor amplifier error 7 of each ID number

Backflow error (rEv)

08HSensor amplifier error 8 of each ID number

(Not used)

09HSensor amplifier error 9 of each ID number

Temperature lower limit error

0AHSensor amplifier error 10 of each ID number

Temperature upper limit error

0BHSensor amplifier error 11 of each ID number

Temperature sensor connection error(Err tEMP)

ErrorID

NumberCode Description Cause Actions

Page 273: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-15

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Warning code list

No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the FD-MH Series sensor amplifiers

connected to the DL-EP1.

The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP

scanner.

External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H

Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)

DL-EP1 data

Scanner's OUT area

Address 0Address 1

Address 9

External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)

1-byte (8-bit) data

Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

External

Input

Request 1

(Integration

Reset)

0 ID08 . . . . . ID01

1Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 2

(Flow HOLD

Reset)

2 ID08 . . . . . ID01

3Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 3

(Unassigned)

4 ID08 . . . . . ID01

5Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 4

(Temperature

HOLD Reset)

6 ID08 . . . . . ID01

7Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

External

Input

Request 5

(Unassigned)

8 ID08 . . . . . ID01

9Reserved for

systemID15 . . . . . ID09

Page 274: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-16

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Parameter List

Name Function Operation

External

Input

Request 1

Integration reset

ON: Executes integration reset. Executing integration reset turns on

external input response 1.

OFF: Turns off external input response 1.

External

Input

Request 2

Flow HOLD

reset

ON: Executes flow HOLD reset. Executing flow HOLD reset turns on

external input response 2.

OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input

response 2.

External

Input

Request 3

(Unassigned) (Unassigned)

External

Input

Request 4

Temperature

HOLD reset

ON: Executes temperature HOLD reset. Executing temperature

HOLD reset turns on external input response 4.

OFF: Turns off external input response 4.

External

Input

Request 5

(Unassigned) (Unassigned)

Page 275: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-17

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1

(cyclic communication).

"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-17)

"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-18)

"Reading the current value (instantaneous flow rate) of the sensor amplifier"

(Page 7-19)

For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"

(Page 7-4).

Reading an output from a sensor amplifier

Available outputs: Output 1, output 2, output 3

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 7-9)

This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic

communication.

Communication Methods

PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0

Sensor amplifier (1)Output

HIGH output of ID 01

10

ONOFF

Page 276: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-18

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier

Available external inputs: Integration reset, flow HOLD reset, temperature HOLD reset

Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance

(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 7-15)

This example shows how to enter flow HOLD reset to the sensor amplifier ID01.

(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was

assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor

amplifier is turned on or off.

(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input

response.

PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [2]Bit0

(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0

Sensor amplifierExternal InputFlow HOLD reset to ID 01

10

ONOFF

10

Page 277: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-19

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Reading the current value (instantaneous flow rate) of the sensor amplifier

The current value (instantaneous flow rate) is read from the IN area to which the ID

number of each sensor amplifier is assigned.

Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance

(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 7-9)

This example shows how to read the current value from the sensor amplifiers ID01,

ID02, and ID03.

(1)When the current value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator

value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.

* If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is

retained without updating the current value.

(2)The property of the current value is entered. If the current value is "over (FFFF)" or

"invalid (----)", the bit corresponding to the ID number of the appropriate sensor

amplifier is set to 1.

* For the FD-MH Series, the current value (instantaneous flow rate) is stored in the

current value 0.

PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]

Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

IN area [48 to 51]

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

IN area [52 to 55]

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

IN area [56 to 59]

Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789

Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890

Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901

(1)

Page 278: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-3 Cyclic communication

7-20

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the

DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1

to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a

connection is opened.

When using scanners of other manufacturers

For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each

scanner.

Checking the Device Compatibility

Page 279: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7-21

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

7-4 Message Communication

This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.

What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?

Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing

commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each

EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not

require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor

settings.

The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication

include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the

device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,

to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.

The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined

UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.

Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

Send

Receive

Receive

Send

(1) Message communication command

(3) Message communication response

(2) Interpret and execute command

Reference

Page 280: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-22

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-

EP1.

[DL-EP1]

The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.

[Scanner]

Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and

send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"

(Page 7-25)

Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable

commands.

The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication

when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-44)

Configuring Message Communication

Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication

FD-MH

Command

Response:1234

FD-MH Current values (instantaneous flow rate): 1234

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)

Page 281: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-23

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-45)

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as integration reset to

the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-46)

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1.

"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 7-48)

FD-MH

Command:1000

Response

FD-MHIntegrated flow rate setting value 1: 150→1000

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0345H(837)Service data: 1000

FD-MH

Command

Response

Integration reset execution by FD-MH

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0302H(770)

FD-MH

Command

Response

Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H

Page 282: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-24

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read

from the sensor amplifier.

"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier" (Page 7-49)

For the FD-MH Series, if the current value is 12.53 l/min, data is stored as

follows:

Data: 1253

Number of decimal places: 2

Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.

FD-MH

Command

Response

DL-EP1Scanner

<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)

Reads the number of decimal places of the FD-MH current values (instantaneous flow rate)

Reference

1253 12.53 12.53 l/minNumber of decimal places

2 1

Page 283: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-25

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.

Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter

change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal

places (5), etc.

Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor

amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the

comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it

possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers

corresponding to the respective instances.

Objects and Services

Parameter change(3)

Operation command execution(4)

Read of the number of decimal places(5)

DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1

Object(1)

(2)

Service

Data output

ID: 0324H Output

Attribute

ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate)

ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value)

DL Object(Class ID: 67H)

DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H

ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H

ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H

:

:

Page 284: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-26

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to

express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects

abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a

group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same

type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a

class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each

uses a unique attribute value.

• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.

The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A

command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance

ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the

command also requires a setting (service data).

* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.

"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"

(Page 7-28)

Reference

Command Response

・Service

・Class ID

・Instance ID

・Attribute ID*

・Service data*

・General Status

・Additional Status*

・Service response data*

Page 285: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-27

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.

Objects Usable by DL-EP1

Command

Response

DLObject

MessageRouterObject

ConnectionManagerObject

AssemblyObject

IdentityObject

TCP/IPInterfaceObject

EthernetLink

Object

EtherNet/IP unit

Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage

DL Object 67H

This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and

the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and

writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to

the DL-EP1.

7-31

Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,

general information and a reset service, etc.9-22

Message Router

Object02H

This object provides connection points for message

communication.9-25

Assembly Object 04H

This object provides access to the devices via cyclic

communication. This object can be used to send data

to the devices that do not support cyclic

communication.

9-26

Connection

Manager Object06H

This object is used for connection-type

communication.9-28

TCP/IP Interface

ObjectF5H

This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/

IP network interface. You can set an IP address,

subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.

9-30

Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34

Page 286: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-28

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for

communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of

Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to

the scanner.

Commands

• Command format

*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-

31) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).

Responses

• Response format

Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication

Item Description

Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).

Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be

used.

Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.

Item Description

General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H

is returned when the command ends normally.

Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).

Service response

data

Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the

command.

Page 287: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-29

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Command processing order and error response

Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:

Supplement for object processing

• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service

data.

• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is

executed, ignoring Attribute ID.

• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),

"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.

• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size

is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is

returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is

executed, ignoring the excessive data.

Class ID check

Yes

No

Instance ID check

Yes

No

Service check

Yes

No

Attribute ID check

Executes supported service process

Yes

No

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status

Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status

Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status

Page 288: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-30

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Reading the attribute ID

Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID

Data Type

The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:

Reading the DL Object Table

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Instance ID

Attribute ID

Name Description Attribute Data Type

00H74H

(116)

Output

1

Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each

sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is set to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9 ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Item Description

(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.

(2) Attribute ID Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.

(3) Name Represents the attribute name.

(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of

parameters that can be set.

(5) Attribute

Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.

R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,

Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.

W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used

to write the attribute value.

(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.

Data Type DescriptionRange

Minimum Maximum

INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767

UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535

DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647

WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -

DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -

STRING

Character string

(2-byte length information +

1-byte array per character)

- -

Page 289: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-31

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This

object is unique to the DL-EP1.

Services

*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).

*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0AH) connected to the DL-EP1.

*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID

90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.

DL Object (Class ID:67H)

Service Code Service Name Description

0EHParameter

read

Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"

(Page 7-44).

10HParameter

write

Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier

connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,

refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 7-45).

4BH*1 Operation

command

Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of

processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.

Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the

object.

refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service

4BH (operation command)" (Page 7-46). For examples of

using this service, refer to

"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier"

(Page 7-46).

4CHBatch lock

setting*2

Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected

sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported

by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor

amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code

09H is returned as a response.

Setting 0: Not lock

Setting 1: Key lock

"Lock setting" (Page 7-32)

For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking

sensor amplifier operations" (Page 7-48).

4DH

Acquisition of the

number of decimal

places *3

Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated

parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)

Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from

a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-49).

Page 290: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-32

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

• Lock setting

Responses

The responses made when each service is used are as follows:

(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH

(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H

(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH

(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH

(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH

Setting Description

0 Does not execute lock.

1Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display

switching and [RESET] button).

GeneralStatus

Command TypeDescription

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

00H Normal end

05H The instance ID is out of range.

08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or

cannot be executed.

09H - - - - The written data is out of range.

0CH - - -

• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled

by cyclic communication.

• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.

Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation

command.

0EH - - - -

• An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that

cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the

unwritable status.

• The written data is out of range.

10H - - - -

An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that

cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the

unreadable status.

13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.

The defined data size is stored in the additional status.

14H - The attribute ID is out of range.

16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated

instance ID is not connected.

1FH

• This service is supported by the designated instance ID

but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.

(Additional status: C350H)

• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be

written into the parameter.

(Additional status: C351H)

• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional

status: C352H)

FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Page 291: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-33

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Attributes

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

00H

64H

(100)Status

Indicates the status of this unit and connected

sensor amplifier.

bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status

Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system

bit14: Warning Status

bit15: Error Status

R WORD

65H

(101)

Sensor Error

Status

Indicates the error status of the connected

senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the

corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned

to ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

66H

(102)

Warning

Status(Unassigned) R WORD

67H

(103)Reserved for system

68H

(104)

Current

Value 0

Property

Indicates the status of current value 0 of each

amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",

“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit

corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

69H

(105)

Current

Value 1

Property

(Unassigned) R WORD

6AH

(106) to

6BH

(107)

Reserved for system

6CH

(108)

Error ID

Number

Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.

Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)R UINT

6DH

(109)Error Code

Indicates the error code that is happening.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

6EH

(110)

Warning ID

Number(Unassigned) R UINT

6FH

(111)

Warning

Code(Unassigned) R UINT

70H

(112) to

73H

(115)

Reserved for system

74H

(116)Output1

Indicates the output 1 status of each sensor

amplifier. When output 1 is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

Page 292: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-34

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

00H

75H

(117)Output2

Indicates the output 2 status of each sensor

amplifier. When output 2 is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

76H

(118)Output3

Indicates the output 3 status of each sensor

amplifier. When output 3 is output, the bit

corresponding to the ID number of the sensor

amplifier is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

77H

(119)

Output4

(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD

78H

(120)

Output5

(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD

79H

(121) to

89H

(137)

Reserved for system

8AH

(138)

Current

Value 0

Invalid

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is

turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8BH

(139)

Current

Value 0

Under Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less

than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit

of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8CH

(140)

Current

Value 0

Over Range

When the current value 0 of each amplifier is

higher than the upper limit of the detection range,

the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON.

Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10

Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system

R WORD

8DH

(141)

Current

Value 1

Invalid

(Unassigned) R WORD

8EH

(142)

Current

Value 1

Under Range

(Unassigned) R WORD

8FH

(143)

Current

Value 1 Over

Range

(Unassigned) R WORD

90H

(144)

Current

Value 0

(ID01)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 1.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R DINT

91H

(145)

to 98H

(152)

:

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 293: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-35

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current

Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 7-12).

00H

99H

(153)

Current

Value 0

(ID10)

Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID

number 10.

Parameter range:

-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)

R WORD

9AH

(154)

to 9EH

(158)

Current

Value 0 (ID

Number 11)

to (ID

Number 15)

(Unassigned) R DINT

9FH

(159)Reserved for system

A0H

(160)

to AEH

(174)

Current

Value 1 (ID

Number 1) to

(ID Number

15)

(Unassigned) R DINT

AFH

(175)Reserved for system

B0H

(176)

Sensor

Status Mask

Setting

Set up the condition to determine if the sensor

error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error

(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS

LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or

warning occurs.

Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)

0: Not mask

1: Mask

R/W UINT

B1H

(177)

Sensor

Connected

Number

Indicates the number of connected sensor

amplifiers.

Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)

R UINT

B2H

(178)

to C7H

(199)

Reserved for system

0300H

(768)

Error Code

(ID number

00)

Indicates the error code of ID number 0.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

0301H

(769) to

0309H

(777)

:

030AH

(778)

Error Code

(ID number

10)

Indicates the error code of ID number 10.

Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT

030BH

(779) to

030FH

(783)

Error Code

(ID number

11) to (ID

number 15)

(Unassigned)

0310H

(784) to

04FFH

(1279)

Reserved for system

Instance ID

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Reference

Page 294: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-36

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Attributes for FD-MH Series

Designate the ID number (01H to 0AH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Group1

0320H

(800)

Group1

Entry count

Indicates the group 1 entry count.

Parameter range: 22R DINT

0321H

(801)

Sensor

amplifier

error state*1

Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier.

Bit 2 : Overcurrent error (ErC)

Bit 3 : EEPROM error (ErE)

Bit 4 : The instantaneous flow rate remains 0.

Bit 5 : Same as Bit 4

Bit 6 : Backflow error (rEv)

Bit 8 : Temperature lower limit error

Bit 9 : Temperature upper limit error

Bit 10 : Temperature sensor connection error

(Err tEMP)

Other than the above: Fixed at 0

R DWORD

0322H

(802) to

0323H

(803)

Reserved for system

0324H

(804)

Control output

Integration

pulse output

Abnormal

alarm output

status*2

Indicates the control output.

Bit 0: Output 1

Bit 1: Output 2

Bit 2: Output 3

Other than the above: Fixed at 0

R DWORD

0325H

(805)

Instantaneous

flow rate

(current

value)*3

Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (current

value).

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9

FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9

R DINT

0326H

(806)

Integrated flow

rate*4

Indicates the integrated flow rate.

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 4294967.29

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 42949672.9

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 42949672.9

FD-MH500A: 0 to 429496729

R DINT

0327H

(807)

Instantaneous

flow rate

(peak hold

value)*3

Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (peak hold

value).

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9

FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9

R DINT

0328H

(808)

Instantaneous

flow rate

(bottom hold

value)*3

Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (bottom

hold value).

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9

FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9

R DINT

Page 295: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-37

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Group1

0329H

(809) to

032AH

(810)

(Reserved for system)

032BH

(811)

Bank

switching

status

Indicates the bank switching status.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Bank A

1: Bank B

R DINT

032CH

(812)(Reserved for system)

032DH

(813)

Current

temperature*5Indicates the current temperature.

Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9R DINT

032EH

(814)

Temperature

peak hold

value*5

Indicates the temperature peak hold value.

Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9R DINT

032FH

(815)

Temperature

peak hold

value*5

Indicates the temperature bottom hold value.

Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9R DINT

0330H

(816) to

0333H

(819)

(Reserved for system)

0334H

(820)

External input

status

Indicates the external input status.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0:OFF

1:ON

R DINT

0335H

(821)(Reserved for system)

0336H

(822)

Temperature

sensor

connection*6

Indicates the temperature sensor connection.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Not connected

1: Connected

R DINT

0337H

(823) to

033FH

(831)

(Reserved for system)

Group2

0340H

(832)

Group2 Entry

count

Indicates the group 2 entry count.

Parameter range: 8R DINT

0341H

(833)

Instantaneous

flow rate

setting value

1(P1)*7

Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting

value 1 (P1).

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 3.00)

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 15.0)

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 30.0)

FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 100.0)

R/W DINT

0342H

(834)

Instantaneous

flow rate

setting value

2(P1)*7

Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting

value 2 (P2).

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 10.00)

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 50.0)

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 100.0)

FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 200.0)

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 296: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-38

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Group2

0343H

(835)

Temperature

upper limit

setting value*8

Indicates the temperature upper limit setting

value.

Parameter range:

0.1 to 99.9: Upper limit value (initial value: 80.0)

100.0: Upper limit detection invalid

R/W DINT

0344H

(836)

Temperature

lower limit

setting value*9

Indicates the temperature lower limit setting

value.

Parameter range:

0.1 to 99.9: Lower limit value (initial value: 5.0)

0.0: Lower limit detection invalid

R/W DINT

0345H

(837)

Integrated

flow rate

setting value

1

Indicates the integrated flow rate setting value

1.

The value obtained by multiplying this value by

the value set in integrated flow rate units serves

as the actual integrated flow rate setting value.

Parameter range: 0 to 9999 (initial value: 150)

R/W DINT

0346H

(838)

Integrated

flow rate

setting value

2

Indicates the integrated flow rate setting value

2.

The value obtained by multiplying this value by

the value set in integrated flow rate units serves

as the actual integrated flow rate setting value.

Parameter range: 0 to 9999 (initial value: 9999)

R/W DINT

0347H

(839)

Instantaneous

flow rate

setting value

3 (P3)*7

Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting

value 3 (P3).

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 13.00)

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 65.0)

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 130.0)

FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 400.0)

R/W DINT

0348H

(840)

Instantaneous

flow rate

setting value

4 (P4)*7

Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting

value 4 (P4).

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 20.00)

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 100.0)

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 200.0)

FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 500.0)

R/W DINT

0349H

(841) to

035FH

(863)

(Reserved for system)

Group3

0360H

(864)

Group3 Entry

count

Indicates the group 3 entry count.

Parameter range: 5R DINT

0361H

(865)

Key lock

function

Indicates the key lock function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Key unlock (initial value)

1: Key lock

R/W DINT

0362H

(866)(Reserved for system)

0363H

(867)

Analog output

selection*10

Indicates the analog output selection.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Standard (initial value)

1: Free range analog

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 297: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-39

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Group3

0364H

(868)

Free range

analog

upper limit*10

Indicates the free range analog upper limit.

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.0 to 30.0

(Initial value: 10.0, settable unit: 0.1)

FD-MH50A: 0 to 100

(Initial value: 50, settable unit: 5)

FD-MH100A: 0 to 200

(Initial value: 100, settable unit: 10)

FD-MH500A: 0 to 1000

(Initial value: 500, settable unit: 50)

R/W DINT

0365H

(869)

Free range

analog

lower limit*10

Indicates the free range analog lower limit.

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.0 to 30.0

(Initial value: 0.0, settable unit: 0.1)

FD-MH50A: 0 to 100

(Initial value: 0, settable unit: 5)

FD-MH100A: 0 to 200

(Initial value: 0, settable unit: 10)

FD-MH500A: 0 to 1000

(Initial value: 0, settable unit: 50)

R/W DINT

0366H

(870) to

037FH

(895)

(Reserved for system)

Group4

0380H

(896)

Group4 Entry

count

Indicates the group 4 entry count.

Parameter range: 29R DINT

0381H

(897)(Reserved for system)

0382H

(898)

Detection

mode

Indicates the Detection mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 4

0: F-1 (initial value)

1:F-2

2:F-3

3:A-1

4:A-2

R/W DINT

0383H

(899)(Reserved for system)

0384H

(900)

Response

time

Indicates the response time.

Parameter range: 0 to 6

0:0.5s

1:1.0s

2:2.5s

3:5.0s (initial value)

4:10.0s

5:30.0s

6:60.0s

R/W DINT

0385H

(901)

Display

averaging*11

Indicates the display averaging.

Parameter range:

0.0 to 10.0 (initial value: 1.0, settable unit: 0.5)

R/W DINT

0386H

(902)

Output 2

timeout time

Indicates the output 2 timeout time.

Parameter range: 1 to 99 (initial value: 10)R/W DINT

0387H

(903)

Integration

direction

Indicates the integration direction.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Increment (initial value)

1: Decrement

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 298: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-40

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Group4

0388H

(904)

Integrated

flow rate unit

Indicates the integrated flow rate unit.

Parameter range: 0 to 6 (initial value: 2)

FD-MH10A: 0 to 4

FD-MH50A: 1 to 5

FD-MH100A: 1 to 5

FD-MH500A: 2 to 6

Parameter list

0:0.01

1:0.1

2:1

3:10

4:100

5:1000

6:10000

R/W DINT

0389H

(905) to

038CH

(908)

(Reserved for system)

038DH

(909)N.O./N.C.

Indicates N.O./N.C.

Bit 0: Output 1 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0)

Bit 1: Output 2 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0)

Bit 2: Output 3 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0)

R/W DWORD

038EH

(910)Display mode

Indicates display mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0:Std

1:rESo

Initial value:

FD-MH10A/FD-MH500A:0

FD-MH50A/FD-MH100A:1

R/W DINT

038FH

(911) Hysteresis*7

Indicates hysteresis.

Parameter range:

FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 9.99 (initial value: 0.10)

FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 49.9 (initial value: 0.5)

FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 99.9 (initial value: 1.0)

FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 499.9 (initial value: 5.0)

R/W DINT

0390H

(912)

Bank

switching

function

Indicates the bank switching function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: OFF (initial value)

1:ON

R/W DINT

0391H

(913)(Reserved for system)

0392H

(914)

Flow zero

function

Indicates the flow zero function.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: OFF (initial value)

1:ON

R/W DINT

0393H

(915)(Reserved for system)

0394H

(916)

Different

frequency

mode

Indicates different frequency mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Standard (initial value)

1: Different frequency mode

R/W DINT

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 299: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-41

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Group4

0395H

(917) to

0396H

(918)

(Reserved for system)

0397H

(919)Eco mode

Indicates eco mode.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Not use (initial value)

1: Use

R/W DINT

0398H

(920) to

039CH

(924)

(Reserved for system)

039DH

(925)

Flow indicator

display color

Indicates the flow indicator display color.

Parameter range: 0 to 1

0: Red when ON, green when OFF

1: Green when ON, red when OFF (initial value)

R/W DINT

039EH

(926) to

039FH

(927)

(Reserved for system)

Group5

03A0H

(928)

Group5

Entry count

Indicates the group 5 entry count.

Parameter range: 2R DINT

03A1H

(929)

Dry water

error

sensitivity

Indicates the dry water sensitivity.

Parameter range: 0 to 500 (initial value: 100)R/W DINT

03A2H

(930)

Dry water

error

detection time

Indicates the dry water detection time. (The unit

is 100 ms.)

Parameter range: 31 to 255 (initial value: 100)

R/W DINT

03A3H

(931) to

03BFH

(959)

(Reserved for system)

Group6

03C0H

(960)

Group6

Entry count

Indicates the group 6 entry count.

Parameter range: 11R DINT

03C1H

(961)Product code

Indicates the product code.

FD-MA*A: Main unit: 4004

FD-MA*A: Expansion unit: 4005

R DINT

03C2H

(962)Revision

Indicates the revision.

Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFHR DINT

03C3H

(963)

Connected

sensor head*6

Indicates the connected sensor head.

Parameter range: 0 to 3

0:FD-MH10A

1:FD-MH50A

2:FD-MH100A

3:FD-MH500A

R DINT

03C4H

(964) to

03C7H

(967)

Reserved for system

03C8H

(968)

Product

name*11Indicates the product name.

"FD-MA*A"R STRING

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 300: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-42

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

*1 You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/

OFF status of each bit.

OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred.

Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to

"FD-MH Series User's Manual".

*2 You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of

each bit.

*3 If the instantaneous flow rate exceeds the upper limit of the display range (if the

display is "FFFF"), data becomes an undefined value that exceeds the upper limit of

the display range. If the sensor amplifier display is ErH, ErS, or rEv or if the sensor

head is in the dry water status, data becomes "0".

Without reference to the display mode set in the sensor amplifier, data for rESo mode is

used.

*4 Data is read in minimum display units without reference to the integration display

unit set in the sensor amplifier. If the integration flow rate exceeds the upper limit,

data retains the upper limit.

*5 If the temperature sensor is not connected, data becomes "0". If the

temperature exceeds the upper limit of the display (if the temperature display

is "FFFF"), data becomes an undefined value that exceeds the upper limit of

the temperature display.

*6 If the sensor amplifier display is ErH, data immediately before ErH is retained.

*7 Without reference to the display mode set in the sensor amplifier, data

becomes identical to the data within the range that can be set in "rESo" mode.

*8 If 100.0 is written, no warning is issued even if data exceeds the upper limit of

the display temperature range. A warning is issued only when data is less than

the lower limit.

*9 If 0.0 is written, no warning is issued even if data becomes less than the lower

limit of the display temperature range. A warning is issued only when data is

greater than or equal to the upper limit.

03C9H

(969) to

03D6H

(982)

Reserved for system

03D7H

(983)Series code

Indicates the series code.

FD-MA*A: Main unit: 4004

FD-MA*A: Expansion unit: 4005

R DINT

03D8H

(984)Series version

Indicates the series version.

Parameter range: 1R DINT

03D9H

(985)Device type

Indicates the device type.

Parameter range: 0R DINT

03DAH

(986) to

03DFH

(991)

Reserved for system

Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data

Type

Page 301: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-43

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

*10 If "analog output selection" is set to "standard", the free range analog becomes

invalid even if "free range analog upper limit" or "free range analog lower limit"

is rewritten.

*11 The read character string is stored as ASCII code.

For "FD-M": 4d2d4446H

Page 302: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-44

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier

(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier

Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor

amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 0EH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Using DL Object

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed

value).0EH

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".0324H(804)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

data

The settings of the read parameter are

returned.0000H

Page 303: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-45

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 7-33).

(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier

Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 16H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).

10H

Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".

0347H(839)

Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)

00H

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Page 304: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-46

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-31) and "Attributes"(Page 7-33).

(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier

Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the

sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4BH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)

The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation

command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.

The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response data

There is no service response data. -

Attribute ID Name Description

0302H(770)Integration flow rate reset

requestResets the integration flow rate.

0303H(771)Reset during hold

(flow)Resets the instantaneous flow hold.

0304H(772)Reset during hold

(temperature)Resets the temperature hold

0305H(773) Initial reset requestRestores all the sensor amplifier

settings to the default settings.

Page 305: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-47

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 7-33).

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"

(fixed value).4BH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number

(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H

Attribute ID

Designates the attribute ID to be designated

from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation

commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute

IDs supported by the instance service 4BH

(operation command)" (Page 7-46)

0301H(769)

Service Data There is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status

A status (00H) is returned that indicates

normal completion of message

communication.

00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Page 306: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-48

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations

Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected

to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4CH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Service Data

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to the DL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensor amplifier arenot changed).

Item Description Data Example

Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"

(fixed value).4CH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a

command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H

Attribute ID There is no data. -

Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 08H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Point

Page 307: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-4 Message Communication

7-49

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor

amplifier

Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from

the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.

Service code 4DH is used.

The following settings are required to use this object.

• Service Code

• Class ID

• Instance ID

• Attribute ID

• Commands

• Responses (when successful)

• Responses (when unsuccessful)

For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each

parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-31) and "Attributes"

(Page 7-33).

Item Description Data Example

Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH

Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H

Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H

Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from

"Attribute".

0325H

(805)

Service Data There is no service data. -

Item Description Data Example

General statusMessage communication has ended

normally.00H

Service response

dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H

Item Description Data Example

General status A general status for the service is returned 14H

Additional status An additional status is returned. -

Service response

dataThere is no service response data. -

Page 308: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

7-50

MEMO

7

Co

mm

unic

atin

g w

ith F

D-M

H S

erie

s

Page 309: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 8-1

8Specifications

8-1 Specifications ..................................................... 8-2

8-2 Data Processing Time ........................................ 8-3

8-3 Dimensions......................................................... 8-5

Page 310: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -8-2

8

Sp

ec

ifica

tion

s

8-1 Specifications

The specifications of the DL-EP1 are as follows:

*1 D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor amplifiers.

*2 The number of connectable sensor units varies with the sensor amplifiers to be

connected.

Product name EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit

Model DL-EP1

Ethernet

specifications

Compliant standardsIEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)

IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)

Transmission rate10Mbps (10BASE-T)

100Mbps (100BASE-TX)

Transmission mediumSTP cable or Category 3 or higher UTP cable (10BASE-T)

STP cable or Category 5 or higher UTP cable (100BASE-TX)

Maximum cable length 100 m (Distance between DL-EP1 and Ethernet switch)

Maximum number of

connectable hubs

4 (10BASE-T)

2 (100BASE-TX)

EtherNet/IP

specifications

Compatible functions

Cyclic communication (Implicit messaging)

Message communication (Explicit messaging)

Compatible with UCMM and Class 3

Number of connections 64

RPI (Transmission cycle) 0.5 to 10000 ms (0.5 ms unit)

Tolerable communication

bandwidth for cyclic

communication

6000pps

Conformance test Compatible with Version A7

Sensor connection

specifications

Connectable sensors Sensor amplifiers with D-bus support*1

Number of connectable

sensor unitsUp to 15 units*2

Indicators

Link/activity indicator (LINK/ACT) :Green LED

Module status indicator (MS) :2-color (green/red) LED

Network status indicator (NS) :2-color (green/red) LED

Sensor communication indicator (D-bus) 2-color (green/red) LED

Power voltageIncluding 20 to 30 VDC ripple (p-p) 10%

(This voltage is supplied from the connected sensor amplifer)

Power consumption 1500 mW or less (at 30 V 50 mA max)

Environmental

resistance

Operating ambient air

temperature-20 to +55 °C (no freezing)

Operating ambient air

humidity35 to 85% RH (no condensation)

Vibration resistance10 to 55 Hz compound amplitude 1.5 mm, 2 hours each in X, Y, Z

directions

Pollution degree 2

Materials Main unit case: Polycarbonate

Weight Approx. 70g

Page 311: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 8-3

8

Sp

ec

ifica

tion

s

8-2 Data Processing Time

This section describes the length of time that lasts from detection by a sensor to data

processing by PLC.

Maximum data processing time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4)

(1)PLC scan time

(2)RPI (Transmission cycle)

(3)DL-EP1 data communication time

(4)Sensor amplifier response time

(2)RPI is set with the scanner unit. It can be set in 0.5 ms increments between 0.5 ms

and 10000 ms.

(3)DL-EP1 data communication time

The time required for sending outputs and current value data from a sensor

amplifier to the DL-EP1 is as follows:

Sensor amplifier with calculation function OFF, or sensor amplifier with no

calculation function

* For the GT2-100, 50 ms is added to the values in the table.

CPU unitEtherNet/IP

scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Number of connected sensor amplifiers

Output, comparator value, or current value

Other than IG Series* IG Series

1 7.8 ms 5.8 ms

2 9.8 ms 10.8 ms

3 13.8 ms 12.8 ms

4 15.8 ms 16.8 ms

5 19.8 ms -

6 21.8 ms -

7 25.8 ms -

8 27.8 ms -

9 31.8 ms -

10 33.8 ms -

11 37.8 ms -

12 39.8 ms -

13 43.8 ms -

14 45.8 ms -

15 49.8 ms -

Page 312: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

8-2 Data Processing Time

8-4

8

Sp

ec

ifica

tion

s

Sensor amplifier with calculation function ON

* For the GT2-100, 75 ms is added to the values in the table.

For details on the PLC scan time in (1) and the sensor amplifier response time in (4),

refer to the manual of each unit.

Number of connected sensor amplifiers

Output, comparator value, or current value

Other than IG Series* IG Series

1 11.3 ms 5.8 ms

2 14.3 ms 10.8 ms

3 20.3 ms 12.8 ms

4 23.3 ms 16.8 ms

5 29.3 ms -

6 32.3 ms -

7 38.3 ms -

8 41.3 ms -

9 47.3 ms -

10 50.3 ms -

11 56.3 ms -

12 59.3 ms -

13 65.3 ms -

14 68.3 ms -

15 74.3 ms -

Page 313: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 8-5

8

Sp

ec

ifica

tion

s

8-3 Dimensions

25.6

35.443.5

94.5

38.1

(42.5

)

29.4

(Unit : mm)

Page 314: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

8

Sp

ec

ifica

tion

s

8-6

MEMO

Page 315: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9-1

9Appendix

9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers..................... 9-2

9-2 Device Profile...................................................... 9-5

9-3 Troubleshooting .................................................. 9-6

9-4 Default Settings .................................................. 9-8

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ............................................... 9-9

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ............................... 9-20

9-7 Index................................................................. 9-39

Page 316: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -9-2

9A

pp

en

dix

9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers

As of July 15, 2010

*1 This sensor cannot be connected to the GT-70 Series.

*2 This sensor cannot be connected to a panel mount type.

*3 For the large display type, up to 11 sensor heads can be connected by adding

head expansion boards to a main unit.

Connectable Sensor Amplifiers

Name Amplifier Form Main Unit Expansion Unit Maximum Number of Connectable Units

High-precision

contact type digital

sensor

GT2 series

DIN rail mount

type

GT2-71(M)(C)N

GT2-71(M)(C)P

GT2-72(C)N

GT2-72(C)P

15 (1 main unit,

14 expansion units)

Panel mount

type

GT2-75N

GT2-75P

GT2-76N

GT2-76P

15 (1 main unit,

14 expansion units)

Large display

type

GT2-100N

GT2-100P-

1

(1 main unit)*3

General-purpose

contact type digital

sensor

GT-70A series*1

DIN rail mount

type

GT-71A

GT-71AP

GT-72A

GT-72AP

10 (1 main unit,

9 expansion units)

Panel mount

type

GT-75A

GT-75AP

GT-76A

GT-76AP

10 (1 main unit,

9 expansion units)

Multi-purpose CCD

laser micrometer

IG Series

DIN rail mount

typeIG-1000 IG-1050

4 (1 main unit,

3 expansion units)Panel mount

typeIG-1500 IG-1550

Transmissive Laser

Discrimination

Sensor

IB Series

DIN rail mount

typeIB-1000 IB-1050

4 (1 main unit,

3 expansion units)Panel mount

typeIB-1500 IB-1550

Electromagnetic

Digital Flow Sensor

FD-MH Series*2

DIN rail mount

type

FD-MA1A

FD-MA1AP

FD-MA2A

FD-MA2AP

10 (1 main unit,

9 expansion units)

Page 317: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers

9-3

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

Different types of sensor amplifiers can be connected to the DL-EP1. However,

connect sensor amplifiers within the following restrictions:

Restrictions on sensor amplifier connection

• Yes: This combination is available.

• No: This combination is not available.

• GT2-100 cannot have a mixed connection with any other types of sensor

amplifiers.

• If GT2-7∗, GT-7∗A, IG, or IB has a mixed connection with any other types of

sensor amplifiers, the calculation function and simultaneous input function cannot

be used.

• If there is even one combination to which a mixed connection is inapplicable

among combinations of connected sensor amplifiers, the DL-EP1 will result in a

"mixed model error (54)".

Restrictions on the number of connectable sensor amplifiers combination of

GT2 series, GT-70A series, IG series, and IB series

* For combinations of seven or more units, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Combination of FD-MH series

Limit the total number of units to be connected to 4 or less.

Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers

GT2-7∗ GT-7∗A IG IB FD-MH

GT2-7∗ - Yes Yes Yes No

GT-7∗A Yes - Yes Yes No

IG Yes Yes - Yes No

IB Yes Yes Yes - No

FD-MH No No No No -

CombinationMaximum number of units

(indicated by “Yes”) that can be connected

GT2-7∗(main and

expansion units)

GT-7∗A(main and

expansion units)

IG or IB(main and

expansion units)

Yes Yes Not connected Up to 10 units in total

Yes Not connected Yes

Up to 6 units in total*

For the IG or IB, however, up to 4

units can be connected.

Not connected Yes Yes

Not connected Not connectedCombination of

IG and IB

Yes Yes Yes

Page 318: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers

9-4

9A

pp

en

dix

Current limitation check

Current limitation check is a function that checks whether expansion units can be

used within rating by checking the amount of current that each unit can pass.

This function checks whether the total consumption current of downstream units is

less than or equal to the allowable current of each unit.

The following values are used as the allowable current and consumption current of

each sensor.

* For the GT2 Series, if nine sensor amplifiers or more are connected, use 27 as

consumption current for calculation.

Model Allowable Current

Consumption Current

DL-EP1 - 20

GT2 Series 400 37*

GT-70A Series 400 32

IG Series 300 64

IB Series 300 21

FD-MH Series 400 37

Main unit

GT2-71N

ID number 1

(1) Allowable Current400

(1)>(2)�OK

Expansion unit

GT2-72A

ID number 2

(1) Allowable Current400

(1)>(2)�OK

Expansion unit

GT2-72A

ID number 3

(1) Allowable Current400

(1)>(2)�OK

Expansion unit

DL-EP1

ID number 0

(1) Allowable Current-

(2) Total current consumed

94

(2) Total current consumed

57

(2) Total current consumed

20

(2) Total current consumed

-(3) Consumption

current37

(3) Consumptioncurrent

37

(3) Consumptioncurrent

37

(3) Consumptioncurrent

20

(1)>(2)�OK

+ + +24V

Upstream Downstream

Page 319: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9-5

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

9-2 Device Profile

Category Item Description

General status

Vendor name Keyence Corporation

Vendor ID 367

Device type 0 (Generic Device)

Revision 1.1

Product code 4501

Product name DL-EP1

Page 320: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -9-6

9A

pp

en

dix

9-3 Troubleshooting

The indicator LEDs on the DL-EP1 can be used to determine the causes of errors.

Link/activity indicator (LINK/ACT)

This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly.

Module status indicator (MS)

This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is operating normally.

* The setting can be changed so that the red LED does not flash.

Link/activity indicator (Green)

Module status indicator (Green)

Network status indicator (Green)

Sensor communication indicator (Green)

LED Status Condition Corrective Action

Green

Solid The DL-EP1 is normally linked. -

FlashingThe DL-EP1 is normally linked and

is now exchanging data.-

Not lit

Power is not supplied to the DL-

EP1.

The DL-EP1 is not linked.

• Check if the power supply is correctly

connected.

• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected

to the sensor amplifier.

• Check if the IP address is correct.

• Check if the power supply of the

connected device or Ethernet switch is

correctly connected.

• Check if the cable is correctly connected.

LED Status Condition Corrective Action

Green Solid The DL-EP1 is normally operating. -

Red

SolidA system error may have occurred

in the DL-EP1.Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Flashing

One or more of the connector

sensors are in the error or warning

status*.

One or more of the connector sensors are in

the error or warning status*.

The number of connected sensor

may have exceed the maximum

number of connectable units.

Check if the number of connected sensors is

less than or equal to the maximum number of

connectable units.

The IP address may be duplicated. Check if the IP address is duplicated.

Not litPower is not supplied to the DL-

EP1.

• Check if the power supply is correctly

connected.

• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected

to the sensor amplifier.

Page 321: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-3 Troubleshooting

9-7

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

Network status indicator (NS)

This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with

EtherNet/IP.

Sensor communication indicator (D-bus)

This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with thesensor amplifier.

If an error occurs, you can identify the cause of the error by reading the error codevia cyclic communication or message communication.

"Error code list" (Page 3-13)

LED Status Condition Corrective Action

GreenSolid

One or more connections are normally established.

If multiple connections are used, the DL-EP1 may be unable to communicate with EtherNet/IP even if the green LED is solid.

Flashing No connection is established. Check if the DL-EP1 is registered in the scanner.

Red

SolidA duplicated IP address was detected.

Check if the IP address setting is duplicated with the IP address setting of the scanner or other adaptors.

FlashingOne or more connections have timed out.

Locate the connections that have timed out and check the power status and wiring of the communication device.

Not lit

Power is not supplied to the DL-EP1.

• Check if the power supply is correctly connected.

• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier.

The IP address is not assigned. Set the IP address.

LED Status

Condition Corrective Action

Solid greenThe DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with the sensor amplifier.

-

Flashing green

After power-on, the DL-EP1 is now starting up.

After it has started up, the DL-EP1 automatically shifts to the normal status.

Solid red

The DL-EP1 could not communicate with the sensor amplifier during its start-up.(Error ID number/code: 00H/52 or 00H/55)

• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier and turn on the power again.

• Check if an unsupported sensor amplifier is connected to the DL-EP1 and turn on the power again.

• If the error cannot be recovered after checking the above, contact your nearest Keyence office.

• Check if the number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the maximum number of connectable units.

• Check if there is an electrical noise source around the DL-EP1.

An attempt to assign an ID number has failed.(Error ID number/code: 00H/51)

The DL-EP1 could not communicate continuously with the sensor amplifier for one second or longer.(Error ID number/code: 00H/57)

A system error may have occurred in the DL-EP1.

Flashing redRepetition of 4 consecutive flashes)

A current limitation error occurred.(Error ID number/code: 00H/56)

Check the sensor amplifier configuration.An unsupported sensor amplifier was connected.(Error ID number/code: 00H/53)

Unconnectable models are mixed. (Error ID number/code: 00H/54)

Flashing red(Flashing at fixed intervals)

Sometimes the DL-EP1 cannot temporarily communicate with the sensor amplifier.(Error ID number/code: 00H/57)

Check if there is an electrical noise source around the DL-EP1. (The error is automatically reset if the cause is removed.)

Not lit Power is not supplied to the DL-EP1.• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the

sensor amplifier.• Check if the power supply is correctly connected.

Page 322: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -9-8

9A

pp

en

dix

9-4 Default Settings

The DL-EP1 can be reset and initialized to the default settings by holding down the

reset switch ( Page 1-4) for three seconds or longer or by using the Identity Object

Reset service ( Page 9-24) for message communication.

The DL-EP1 default settings are as follows:

* Only the BOOTP client function can be used when the IP address is 0.0.0.0. The

IP address must be set to use any other functions.

Setting Item Value after Initialization

Communication speed 10/100 Mbps automatic

IP address setting method BOOTP

IP address 0.0.0.0*

Netmask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway 0.0.0.0

Sensor status mask settingMS LED flashes in red when a sensor error or warning

occurs.

Multicast TTL 1

Multicast assignment method 0 (Automatic)

Number of multicast addresses 32

Multicast address 239.255.0.0

Page 323: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9-9

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

This section explains the procedures for communicating with the DL-EP1 using an

Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC (EtherNet/IP scanner).

The DL-EP1 is capable of the following communication when connected to an Allen-

Bradley ControlLogix PLC.

• Cyclic communication function maximum data size: 496 bytes

• Message communication function: Class3/UCMM

Changing the cyclic communication settings

Refer to the PLC instruction manual for details on the PLC unit configuration and

settings such as RsLinx, required for communicating with the PC.

1 Select the EIP communication module (1756-ENBT) connected with the

DL-EP1 from RsLogix500 I/O Configuration, and then select "New Module"

with a right click.

Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

Page 324: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-10

9A

pp

en

dix

2 Add "ETHERNET-MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module)".

3 Change the settings as required.

Name

Choose a name. The following tags are generated based on the name set

here, and are used as the data exchanged with cyclic communication.

• (Name): I Data received from DL-EP1

• (Name): O Data sent to DL-EP1

• (Name): C Not used.

Comm Format

Designate [Data INT].

IP Address

Designate the DL-EP1's IP address.

Input (DL-EP1 send data size)

• Instance number: 100 (decimal)

• Data size: Value up to 84

Output (DL-EP1 receive data size)

• Instance number 101 (decimal)

• Data size: Value up to 5

Configuration

• Instance number: 1 (decimal)

• Data size: 0

Page 325: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-11

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

• For the details of InputOnly connection, refer to "Sending data to

multiple PLCs (InputOnly)" (Page 9-11).

• Refer to "Usable Connections" (Page 3-7) for details on the

connection.

RPI

Designate the cyclic communication interval.

Designate a value between 0.5 and 3200 ms.

4 Download the settings to the PLC.

EtherNet/IP communication is enabled after the settings are downloaded

and the status is switched to online.

Sending data to multiple PLCs (InputOnly)

By connecting to multiple PLCs with the InputOnly connection format, multiple

PLCs can receive the data sent from the DL-EP1. Each PLC must be set as

shown below to use the InputOnly connection.

Setting ItemBidirectional

Communication PLC (maximum 1 unit)

PLC Connected with InputOnly

RPI value User set value Same value as left

InputAssembly Instance

numberNo. 100 (decimal) Same value as left

InputAssembly data size User set value Same value as left

OutputAssembly Instance

numberNo. 101 (decimal) No. 254 (decimal)

OutputAssembly data size User set value 0 bite

Comm Format Data-INT Input Data INT

Reference

Page 326: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-12

9A

pp

en

dix

To carry out cyclic communication with multiple PLCs using theInputOnly connection, the DL-EP1 input data must be sent as aMulticast packet. With ControlLogix, the DL-EP1 transmission isfixed to Multicast packet. However, caution is required when usingdevices, such as KV or SYSMAC, for which the connection methodcan be selected from Multicast or Point to Point.

Changing the message communication settings

After completing "Changing the cyclic communication settings" (Page 9-9), issue

the MSG instruction from the ladder program to execute message communication.)

• Refer to "Logix500 Controllers General Instructions" (1756-RM003) for

details on the MSG instructions.

• Select Inhibit Module when not using cyclic communication.

1 Define the following tags under the RsLogix5000 "Controller Tags" field.

• Tag for storing control information for MSG instruction (message- Message

type)

• Tag for storing data exchanged with MSG instruction (tx_param, rx_param -

INT type)

Point

Reference

Page 327: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-13

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

2 Add the MSG instruction to the RsLogix5000 ladder.

3 Open the "Configuration" tab in the Message instruction setting dialog,

and change the MSG instruction setting.

Message Type

Select "CIP Generic".

ServiceType, Class, Instance, Attribute

Designate a value which matches the message to be sent.

• Example 1: Writing data to DL Object "Bank 0 HIGH setting" when writing

data to attributes

Item Setting Value

ServiceType SetAttributeSingle

ServiceCode - (Cannot be designated)

Class 67H

Instance 01H

Attribute 0341H

SourceElement Name of tag storing send data

SourceLength 4 byte (attribute size is 4)

Destination - (Cannot be designated)

Page 328: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-14

9A

pp

en

dix

• Example 2: Retrieving DL Object "Output 3 (GO)" data when reading

attributes

4 Open the "Communication" tab, and change the MSG communication

settings.

Path

Designate the device name set in "Configuration for cyclic communication".

(An example for the DLEP1 device is shown above.)

Connected, Cache Connections

• For UCMM connection: Invalidate bidirectional (default setting)

• For Class3 connection: Validate bidirectional

5 Describe the process for setting the send data and retrieving the receive

data with the ladder program, and download it to the PLC.

Item Setting Value

ServiceType GetAttributeSingle

ServiceCode - (cannot be designated)

Class 67H

Instance 02H

Attribute 76H

SourceElement - (cannot be designated)

SourceLength - (cannot be designated)

Destination Name of tag storing received data.

Page 329: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-15

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

The DL-EP1 is capable of the following communication when connected to an Allen-

Bradley SLC5/05 PLC.

• Message communication function: Class3

The size of attribute ID used for SLC5/05 Series is 1 byte or smaller.The SLC5/05 Series does not support the parameter which contains 2 byteattribute ID.

• The SLC5/05 Series does not support the cyclic communication

function, but by accessing the DL-EP1's Assembly Object with

messages, control can be executed with the same data type and

procedures as cyclic communication.

• Up to 248 bytes can be exchanged with the SLC5/05 series message

communication.

• Do not exceed this size when exchanging data with message

communication.

• The Assembly Object data size is the same as the cyclic

communication data size set in the DL-EP1 properties. When using

the SLC5/05, confirm that this value is 248 bytes.

Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC

Point

Reference

Page 330: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-16

9A

pp

en

dix

Changing the message communication configuration

Message communication is carried out with a ladder program using EEM

instructions.

Refer to the "SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual" (1747-RM001),

etc., for details on the EEM instructions.

1 Define the following file in the RsLogix500 "Data Files" field.

• File storing EEM instruction control information (message-Integer type)

• File storing data exchanged with EEM instruction (tx_param, rx_param -

Integer type)

2 Add EEM instruction to RsLogix500 ladder.

Reference

Page 331: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-17

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

3 Designate the File used in the EEM instruction defined in Step 1 for the

EEM instruction Control Block, and open the SetupScreen.

Service, Class, Instance, Attribute

Designate a value which matches the message to be sent.

• Example 1: Retrieving DL Object "Output 3 (GO)" data when reading

attributes

Item Setting Value

ServiceType Generic Set Attribute Single

ServiceCode - (Cannot be designated)

Class 67H

Instance 02H

Attribute 76H

Data Table Address (Send data) - (Cannot be designated)

Size In Words (Send data) - (Cannot be designated)

Data Table Address (Received

data)Name of file storing send data

Size In Words (Received data) 1 word (attribute size is 1)

Page 332: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-18

9A

pp

en

dix

• Example 2: To control with same format and procedure as set cycle data,

Access the Assembly Object attribute3: data.

1) Retrieving the DL-EP1 input data

* The message exchanged with SLC5/05 can have up to 124 words (248

bytes). Confirm that the cyclic communication data size is set to 248 in the

DL-EP1 properties.

2) Setting the DL-EP1 output data

* The message exchanged with SLC5/05 can have up to 124 words (248

bytes). Confirm that the cyclic communication data size is set to 248 in the

DL-EP1 properties.

Item Setting Value

Service ReadAssembly

ServiceCode 0EHex (Cannot be designated)

Class 04Hex (Cannot be designated)

Instance 64Hex (Monitor Data)

Attribute 03Hex (Cannot be designated)

Data Table Address (Send data) (Cannot be designated)

Size In Words (Send data) (Cannot be designated)

Data Table Address (Received

data)Name of file storing send data

Size In Words (Received data) 84 words

Value of file storing send data

Data following the format assigned to the DL-EP1

set cycle data communication allocation can be

retrieved.

Item Setting Value

Service WriteAssembly

ServiceCode 10Hex (Cannot be designated)

Class 04Hex (Cannot be designated)

Instance 65Hex (External Input)

Attribute 03Hex (Cannot be designated)

Data Table Address (Send data) Name of file storing send data

Size In Words (Send data) 5 words

Data Table Address (Received

data) (Cannot be designated)

Size In Words (Received data) (Cannot be designated)

Value of file storing send dataDesignate with data having a format following the

DL-EP1 set cycle data communication allocation.

Page 333: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

9-19

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

4 Open the "MultiHop" tab, and set the DL-EP1 IP address.

The above screen is an example of when the DL-EP1 IP address is

192.168.0.10.

5 Open the "Send Data" tab and "Receive Data" tab, and check the contents

of the file containing the send and receive data.

6 Describe the process for setting the send data and retrieving the receive data in a ladder program, and download it to the PLC.

Page 334: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -9-20

9A

pp

en

dix

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

This section describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.

The DL-EP1 can use the following objects:

For details on DL Object, refer to "DL Object" of each sensor amplifier.

GT2 Series (Page 3-31)

GT-70A Series (Page 4-31)

IG Series (Page 5-33)

IB Series (Page 6-33)

FD-MH Series (Page 7-31)

List of Usable Objects

Object Name Class ID Instance ID

Identity Object 1(01H) 1(01H)

Message Router Object 2(02H) 1(01H)

Assembly Object 4(04H) 100(64H) to 101(65H)

Connection Manager Object 6(06H) 1(01H)

DL Object 103(67H) 0(00H) to 15(0FH)

TCP/IP Interface Object 245(F5H) 1(01H)

Ethernet Link Object 246(F6H) 1(01H)

Page 335: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-21

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

Reading class attributes and instance attributes

Example) Excerpt from DL Object class attributes

Data type

The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:

Reading Each Object Table

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type Parameter Range

01H Vendor ID Indicates the vendor ID. R UINT 367

Item Description

(1) Attribute ID Indicates the attribute ID in hexadecimal notation.

(2) Name Indicates the attribute name.

(3) Description Describes the attribute.

(4) Attribute

Indicates the direction of services for the attribute ID.

R (read): Get_Attribute_Single or Get_Attributes_All can be used to read

attribute values.

W (Write): Set_Attribute_Single can be used to write an attribute value.

(5) Data type Indicates the attribute data type.

(6) Parameter rangeIndicates the data to be read from attributes or the range of parameters that

can be set.

Data Type DescriptionRange

Minimum Maximum

INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767

UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535

USINT Unsigned 8-bit integer 0 255

UDINT Unsigned 32-bit integer 0 232-1

WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -

DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -

BYTE Bit string: 8 bits - -

SHORT_STRING

Character string

(1-byte length information + 1-byte array per

character)

- -

STRING

Character string

(2-byte length information + 1-byte array per

character)

- -

Page 336: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-22

Identity Object

9A

pp

en

dix

This object provides DL-EP1 identification information, general information and a

reset service, etc.

Class

Class service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H).

Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)

Instance

Instance service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Get_Attributes_All (01H), and

Reset service (05H).

For details on Reset service, refer to "Reset service" (Page 9-24).

Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)

Identity Object (Class ID: 01H)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0001H

02H Max InstanceMaximum instance number

R UINT 0001H

03HNumber of Instances

Number of instances in generated object

R UINT 0001H

06HMaximum ID Number Class Attributes

Maximum attribute ID of class attribute

R UINT 0007H

07HMaximum ID Number Instance Attributes

Maximum attribute ID of instance attribute

R UINT 0007H

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

01H Vendor IDVendor identification

numberR UINT 016FH

02H Device Type General device type R UINT 0000

03H Product CodeProduct identification

codeR UINT 1195H

04H

Revision Identity object revision R Structure -

Major Revision Major revision USINT 01H

Minor Revision Minor revision USINT 01H

05H Status DL-EP1 status R WORD Reference 1

06H Serial Number Serial number R UDINT Serial number

07H Product Name Product name RSHORT_

STRING“DL-EP1”

Page 337: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-23

Identity Object

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

Reference 1) Details of status (16 bits)

Bit Name Description

0 OwnedON: This bit is set to ON when one or more class1 or class3

connections are established.

1 Reserved Always OFF.

2 Reserved Always ON.

3 Reserved Always OFF.

4 to 7Extended Device

Status

Bits 4 to 7 are set according to the DL-EN1 status as follows:

0101(1): The DL-EP1 is in the unrecoverable fault status (1).

0010(2): The DL-EP1 is not (1) and one or more connections

have timed out.

0011(3): The DL-EP1 is neither (1) or (2) and no connection

is established.

0110(4): The DL-EP1 is not (1), (2), or (3) and there is one or

more connections that are in the RUN status.

0111: The DL-EP1 is in a status other than (1) to (4).

8Minor Recoverable

FaultAlways OFF.

9Minor

Unrecoverable FaultAlways OFF.

10Major Recoverable

Fault

ON: This bit is set to ON when a recoverable unit error occurs.

The red MS LED flashes.

11Major

Unrecoverable Fault

ON: This bit is set to ON when an unrecoverable unit error

(EEPROM read error, etc.) occurs.

The red MS LED is lit.

12 to 15 Reserved Always OFF.

Page 338: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-24

Identity Object

9A

pp

en

dix

Reset service

The Reset service is a CIP standard function used to emulate the same operations as

power restart as much as possible. When it accepts this service, the DL-EP1 stops

each function, interrupts communication, and reads the settings again. The Reset

service is used as a restart request for reflecting changed parameters (e.g., IP

address, Ethernet communication speed, etc.).

Execute this service by designating 01H as the Instance ID of the Identity object.

• The commands received during Reset processing may be discarded.• The response for the Reset service is returned before the DL-EP1 starts

reset processing.

List of general and additional statuses returned to each service

Service Code Service Name Service Data (1 Byte)

05H Reset

00H: Emulates power reset. (Initial value)

01H: Restores the default settings and emulates power reset.

For details on the default settings, refer to "Default

Settings" (Page 9-8).

• If the DL-EP1 receives the Reset service when 02H or

higher is set, 03H (Invalid parameter value) is returned as

the CIP error code.

Point

Service GeneralStatus

Additional (Extended)

StatusDescription

Get_Attributes_

All

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

Reset

00H - The service has ended normally.

03H - The designated reset method is incorrect.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

Get_Attribute_

Single

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.

Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.

Page 339: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-25

Message Router Object

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

This object provides connection points for message communication.

Class

Class service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH).

Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)

Instance

Instance service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH).

Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)

Message Router Object (Class ID: 02H)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0001H

02H Max InstanceMaximum instance

numberR UINT 0001H

03HNumber of

Instances

Number of instances in

generated objectR UINT 0001H

06H

Maximum ID

Number Class

Attributes

Maximum attribute ID of

class attributeR UINT 0007H

07H

Maximum ID

Number

Instance

Attributes

Maximum attribute ID of

instance attributeR UINT 0002H

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

Parameter Range

01H

Object_listSupported

object listR Structure -

NumberNumber of classes

supported in class arrayUINT 0007H

Classes Class ID list

UNIT-

type

array

0001H

0002H

0004H

0006H

00F5H

00F6H

0067H

02HNumber

Available

Maximum number of

connectionsR UINT 0040H

Page 340: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-26

Message Router Object

9A

pp

en

dix

List of general and additional statuses returned to each service

This object directly accesses and controls the data, which is exchanged via cyclic

communication, via message communication. This object can be used to send data

to the devices that do not support cyclic communication.

Class

Class service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH).

Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)

Instance

Instance service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Set_Attribute_Single (10H).

Instance attribute (instance ID: 64H to 65H)

The instance ID is assigned when it is used to set a tag.

Instance ID: 64H to 65H

*1 Reading with Get_Attribute_Single ensures synchronism in instance ID units.

Name GeneralStatus

Additional (Extended)

StatusDescription

Get_Attribute_Single

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.

Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.

Assembly Object (Class ID: 04H)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0002H

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

03H DataData assigned to Instance

IDR/W

BYTE

array

Number of bytes

assigned to instance

ID*1*2

04H SizeNumber of bytes

assigned to Instance IDR UINT

Set size assigned to

instance ID (byte

unit)

Page 341: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-27

Assembly Object

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

*2 For details on the data assigned to each instance ID, refer to "monitor data"

(instance ID: 64H) and "external input" (instance ID: 65H) of each sensor

amplifier.

GT2 Series(Page 3-30)

GT-70A Series(Page 4-29)

IG Series(Page 5-31)

IB Series(Page 6-31)

FD-MH Series(Page 7-29)

List of general and additional statuses returned to each service

Name GeneralStatus

Additional (Extended)

StatusDescription

Get_Attribute_Single

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.

Set_Attribute_Single

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

08H -The instance ID whose attribute is read (R)

was designated.

0CH -

An attempt was made to execute the

service for the instance during cyclic

communication.

0EH -The designated attribute ID cannot be

written.

14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.

15H -An attempt was made to write the data

larger than the defined size.

Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.

Page 342: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-28

Connection Manager Object

9A

pp

en

dix

This object is used for connection-type communication. Use this to establish a

connection for the DL-EP1.

Class

Class service/class attribute

There is no class service and attribute.

Instance

Instance service

This object supports Forward_Close (4EH) and Forward_Open (54H). For details

on instance services, refer to the CIP Specifications.

Instance attribute

There is no instance attribute.

List of general and additional statuses returned to each service

Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06H)

Name GeneralStatus

Additional (Extended)

StatusDescription

Forward_Close

00H - The service has ended normally.

04H - An attribute ID was designated.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

13H - The length of send data is too short.

Forward_Open

00H - The service has ended normally.

01H

0100H The designated connection is already in use.

0103H The designated trigger cannot be used.

0106H

• The Connection Point in the target ⇒ originator direction designated in ForwardOpen connection path via cyclic communication is already in use, and is Point to Point.

• The connection type you attempted to establish is Point To Point.

• The size being used differs from the size you are trying to establish.

0108H• The connection in the send direction is not Point to Point.• The connection parameter in the receive direction is not

Point To Point or Multicast.

0109HThe size you are trying to open is larger than the connection

size of the DL-EP1.*1

0111H

• The timeout multiplier is greater than 7.• An RPI less than 500 µs or greater than 10 s was

designated.*2

0114HVendorIDs do not match.ProductCodes do not match.

0115H DeviceTypes do not match.

0116H The revisions do not match.

Page 343: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-29

Connection Manager Object

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

*1 Forward_Open is successful if the size you are trying to open is less than the

size defined in the scan list. If this error occurs, an extended status is added

and the data size of the tag defined in the second extended status is returned.

*2 RPI is set in increments of 500 µs. If a value that cannot be divided by 500 µs is

set, an RPI rounded to the nearest 500 µs is designated.

Forward_Open

01H

0315H

• Connection Size of the ForwardOpen network connection parameter is 0.

• Connection Path of ForwardOpen does not include ConnectionPoint.

• In Connection Path class ID of ForwardOpen, a value other than 0x04 was set as cyclic or a value other than 02H was set as Class 3.

• In Class3, a value other than 1 is set as the instance ID of Connection Path of ForwardOpen.

• There is a setting unique to the product (data segment).• In cyclic communication, an invalid Connection Point is

designated in the send direction of Connection Path of ForwardOpen.

• In cyclic communication, a value other than 2 is designated as the Connection Size network connection parameter in the send direction of ForwardOpen.

• In cyclic communication, an invalid Connection Point is designated in the receive direction of Connection Path of ForwardOpen.

0322HAn error occurred when the DL-EP1 was reinitializing communication or when it was communicating with a sensor amplifier.

0323H An unsupported sensor was connected.

0324H The connected sensors are in an unmixable combination.

0326H Too many sensors are connected.

04C2H A product-unique setting error occurred.

0640H-067FHThe appropriate device is not connected or an error occurred during communication between sensors.

06C0H-06FFH The number of occupied slots is different

0700H-073FHWhen "Check Model Match" is selected as compatibility check, ProductCodes do not match.

0740H-077FHWhen "Check Model Match" is selected as compatibility check, the major revisions or minor revisions do not match.

0780H-07BFHWhen "Check Series" is selected as compatibility check, the series codes do not match.

07C0H-07FFHWhen "Check Series" is selected as compatibility check, the series version of the real machine is lower than the set series version.

02H -The maximum number of connections have already been used.

04H - The attribute ID is already designated.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

13H - The length of send data is too short.

15H - The length of send data is too large.

Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.

Name GeneralStatus

Additional (Extended)

StatusDescription

Page 344: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-30

TCP/IP Interface Object

9A

pp

en

dix

This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/ IP network interface. The IP

address, subnet mask and gateway, etc, can be set.

Class

Class service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H).

Class attribute (instance ID: 0)

Instance

Instance service

• This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Set_Attribute_Single (10H),

and Get_Attributes_All (01H).

• If the internal process of the previous Set_Attribute_Single in the

Set_Attribute_Single executed for the writable Attribute ID is not completed, the

general status "0CH" (Object State Conflict) is returned.

• Changes to the writable Attribute ID are reflected when the power supply is

restarted or when the reset service is executed.

TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5H)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0001H

02H Max InstanceMaximum instance

numberR UINT 0001H

03HNumber of

Instances

Number of instances in

generated objectR UINT 0001H

Page 345: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-31

TCP/IP Interface Object

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

Instance attributes (instance ID: 1)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

01H Status Interface status R DWORD Reference 1

02HConfigurationCapability

Method for acquiring initial IP address

R DWORD Reference 2

03HConfigurationControl

Method in which the device acquires initialization at start-up

R/W DWORD Reference 3

04H

PhysicalLink Object

Path to physical link object

R

Structure -

Path size Path size (bytes) UINT 0004H

PathSegment for identifying physical link object

PaddedEPATH

20F62401H

05H

Interface Configuration

TCP/IP network interface setting

R/W

Structure -

IP AddressDevice IP address(IP address)

UDINT Setting value*1

Network MaskDevice network mask(Subnet mask)

UDINT Setting value*1

Gateway Address

Default gateway address(Gateway address)

UDINT Setting value*1

Name ServerPrimary name server(DNS server)

UDINT Setting value*1

Name Server 2Secondary name server (reserved)

UDINT Setting value*1

Domain NameDefault domain name(reserved)

STRING" "(character string can be set)

06H Host Name Host name R/W STRING" "(character string can be set)

08H TTL Value Multicast TTL R/W USINT1 (1 to 255)

setting value1*1

09H

Mcast Config Multicast address setting

R/W

Structure -

Alloc ControlMulticast address setting function (multicast allocation method)

USINT

0: Automatic allocation1:User-designated allocation

Reserved Reserved USINT 00H

Num Mcast

Number of multicast addresses(Number of multicast addresses)

UINT

For automatic allocation: 0020HFor user-designated allocation: 1 to

256*1

Mcast Start Addr

Start multicast address(Allocation start multicast address)

UDINT

For automatic

allocation: *2

For user-designated allocation:

Setting value*1

Page 346: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-32

TCP/IP Interface Object

9A

pp

en

dix

*1 If an invalid value is written, the general status 09H (Invalid Attribute Value) is

returned.

*2 When automatic allocation is selected, the start multicast address is calculated

from the expression "239.192.1.0+ ((IP address host section -1) * 03FF) x 32).

(Example)

When the IP address is 192.168.0.10, the multicast address is as follows:

Start address = 239.192.1.0 + (((192.168.0.10 - 1) & 0x3FF) << 5)

= 239.192.1.0 + ((192.168.0.9 & 0x3FF) << 5)

= 239.192.1.0 + (0.0.0.9 << 5)

= 239.192.1.0 + 0.0.1.32

= 239.192.2.32

Reference 1) Status list

Reference 2) Configuration capability list

Reference 3) Configuration control list

Bit Name Description

0 to 3Interface Configuration

Status

0: IP address is not set (BOOTP start state).

1: IP address is set.

2 or higher: The DL-EP1 returns nothing.

4 Mcast Pending

This bit is set to 1 when "TTL Value" or "Mcast Config" is

set.

This bit is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on

again.

5 to 31 Reserved All these bits are fixed at OFF.

Bit Name Description

0 BOOTP Client ON (fixed)

1 DNS Client OFF (fixed)

2 DHCP Client OFF (fixed)

3 DHCP-DNS Update OFF (fixed)

4 Configuration Settable ON (fixed)

5 to 31 Reserved OFF (fixed)

Bit Name Description

0 to 3 StartupConfiguration

Display and set the "IP address setting method" of the IP

address setting tool.

0: Fixed IP address

1:BOOTP

2 to 15: The IP address cannot be set. If the IP address is

set, the general status 09H (Bad attribute data value) is

returned.

4 DNS Enable OFF (fixed): The operation set by this bit is ignored.

5 to 31 Reserved All these bits are fixed at OFF.

Page 347: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-33

TCP/IP Interface Object

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

List of general and additional statuses returned to each service

Name GeneralStatus

Additional (Extended)

StatusDescription

Get_Attributes_All00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

Get_Attribute_Single

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.

Set_Attribute_Single

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

09H - The written value is invalid.

0EH - The designated attribute ID cannot be written.

13H - The length of send data is too short.

14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.

Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.

Page 348: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-34

Ethernet Link Object

9A

pp

en

dix

This object provides Ethernet status information.

Class

Class service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H).

Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)

Instance

Instance service

This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Set_Attribute_Single (10H), and

Get_Attributes_All (01H).

Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)

Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6H)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0002H

02H Max InstanceMaximum instance

numberR UINT 0001H

03HNumber of

Instances

Number of instances in

generated objectR UINT 0001H

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

01H Interface SpeedInterface communication speed

R UDINT 10, 100

02H Interface Flags Interface status flag R DWORD (Reference 1)

03HPhysical Address

MAC layer address RARRAY

of 6 USINTs

Current value

04H

Interface Counters

R

Structure -

In Octets

Number of octets received on the interface.Includes the unnecessary multicast packets and discarded packets counted with In Discards.

UDINT Current value

In Ucast Packets

Number of unicast packets received on the interface. Does not include the discarded packets counted with In Discards.

UDINT Current value

Page 349: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-35

Ethernet Link Object

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

04H

In NUcast Packets

Number of nonunicast packets received on the interface.Includes the unnecessary multicast packets but does not include the discarded packets counted with In Discards.

R

UDINT Current value

In Discards

Number of inbound packets discarded after they had been received on the interface.

UDINT Current value

In ErrorsNumber of inbound packets including errors. Not included in In Discards.

UDINT Current value

In Unknown Protos

Number of inbound packets including unknown protocols.

UDINT 0 (fixed)

Out OctetsNumber of octets received on the interface.

UDINT Current value

Out Ucast Packets

Number of unicast packets sent on the interface.

UDINT Current value

Out NUcast Packets

Number of nonunicast packets sent on the interface.

UDINT Current value

Out DiscardsNumber of discarded outbound packets.

UDINT Current value

Out ErrorsNumber of outbound packets including errors.

UDINT Current value

05H

Media Counters Counter unique to media.

R

Structure -

Alignment Errors

Number of received frames whose lengths are not an octet integer.

UDINT Current value

FCS ErrorsNumber of received frames for which FCS check is unsuccessful.

UDINT Current value

Single Collisions

Number of successfully sent frames with only one collision.

UDINT 0 (fixed)

Multiple Collisions

Number of successfully sent frames with two or more collisions.

UDINT 0 (fixed)

SQE Test ErrorsNumber of times SQE test error messenger was generated.

UDINT 0 (fixed)

Deferred Transmissions

Number of frames whose first transmission was deferred because media was busy.

UDINT 0 (fixed)

Late CollisionsNumber of collisions detected in packet transmission later than 512-bit time.

UDINT 0 (fixed)

Excessive Collisions

Number of frames whose transmission failed because of excessive collisions.

UDINT 0 (fixed)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

Page 350: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-36

Ethernet Link Object

9A

pp

en

dix

*1 The following interface speeds can be set as Forced Interface Speed.

When auto-negotiation is disabled (half-duplex): fixed at 10 Mbps (setting

value: 10)

When auto-negotiation is enabled (half-duplex/full duplex): 100/10 Mbps

automatic (setting value: 0 or 100)

Reference 1) Interface flags list

05H

MAC Transmit Errors

Number of frames whose transmission failed because of internal MAC sublayer transmit error.

R

UDINT 0 (fixed)

Carrier Sense Errors

Number of times the carrier sense condition was lost or not asserted when an attempt was made to send frames.

UDINT Current value

Frame Too Long

Number of received frames that exceeded the maximum tolerable frame size.

UDINT Current value

MAC Receive Errors

Number of frames that could not be received on the interface due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.

UDINT 0 (fixed)

06H

Interface Control

Setting of the following physical interfaces.

WFollowing structure

-

Control BitsInterface control bit (designation of AutoNego, full duplex).

WORD (Reference 2)

Forced Interface Speed

Operation speed forced by interface (fixed to 10 Mbps, etc.).

UINT Setting value*1

Bit Name Description

0 Link StatusOFF: Non-active link

ON: Active link

1 Half/Full DuplexOFF: Half-duplex

ON: Full duplex (OFF when Link Status=0)

2 to 4 Negotiation Status

0: Auto-negotiation is in progress.

1: Auto-negotiation and speed could not be detected.

2: Auto-negotiation failed but speed was successfully

detected.

3: Speed and duplex mode were successfully

negotiated.

4: Auto-negotiation cannot be performed.

(When communication speed is fixed at 10 Mbps)

5Manual Setting

Requires Speed

OFF: Changes can be automatically reflected. ON: Reset

service is required to reflect changes (fixed).

6 Local Hardware Fault OFF (fixed)

7 to 31 Reserved OFF (fixed)

Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type

ParameterRange

Page 351: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1

9-37

Ethernet Link Object

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

Reference 2) Control bits list

List of general and additional statuses returned to each service

Bit Name Description

0 Auto-negotiate

OFF: Auto-negotiation is disabled (communication

setting is fixed at 10 Mbps).

ON: Auto-negotiation is enabled (communication setting

is fixed at 100/10 Mbps auto).

1 ForcedDuplex Mode OFF (fixed)

2 to 15 Reserved OFF (fixed)

Error Code GeneralStatus

Additional (Extended)

StatusDescription

Get_Attributes_All00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

Get_Attribute_Single

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.

Set_Attribute_Single

00H - The service has ended normally.

05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.

09H - The written value is invalid.

0CH -The object cannot execute the requested

service in the current state.

0EH - The designated attribute ID cannot be written.

13H - The length of send data is too short.

14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.

Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.

Page 352: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

9-38

MEMO

9A

pp

en

dix

Page 353: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

9A

pp

en

dix

9-7 Index

9

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Netwo

C

Checking the Package Contents .......... 1-3

Package contents .......................... 1-3

Configuring Communication with the

DL-EP1 .................................................. 2-12

DL-EP1 Settings ........................... 2-12

Configuring Communication with the

Scanner ................................................. 2-15

Setting the scanner ..................... 2-15

Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers ...... 9-2

Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ... 9-2

Mixed Connection of Sensor

amplifiers ........................................ 9-3

D

Data Processing Time ............................ 8-3

Device Profile .......................................... 9-5

Dimensions ............................................. 8-5

DL-EP1 Overview ................................... 1-2

Overview ......................................... 1-2

Types and Number of Connectable

Sensor Amplifiers ........................... 1-2

F

FD-MH Series

Assignment to IN Area

(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 7-8

Assignment to OUT Area

(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 7-15

Basic Format and Processing Flow

of Message Communication ....... 7-28

Checking the Device

Compatibility ................................ 7-20

Communication Methods ............ 7-17

Configuring Cyclic

Communication .............................. 7-6

Configuring Message

Communication ............................ 7-22

Cyclic communication ................... 7-5

DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 7-31

DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication

Functions ........................................ 7-3

Message Communication ........... 7-21

Objects and Services .................. 7-25

Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ......... 7-27

Overview of Communication

Methods .......................................... 7-3

Reading the DL Object Table .... 7-30

-39

rk Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

Usable Connections ...................... 7-7

Using DL Object .......................... 7-44

What can Cyclic Communication

do? .................................................. 7-6

What can Message Communication

do? ................................................ 7-22

What is EtherNet/IP? ...................... 7-2

G

GT2 Series

Assignment to IN Area

(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 3-8

Assignment to OUT Area

(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 3-15

Basic Format and Processing Flow

of Message Communication ...... 3-28

Checking the Device

Compatibility ................................ 3-20

Communication Methods ............ 3-17

Configuring Cyclic

Communication .............................. 3-6

Configuring Message

Communication ............................ 3-22

Cyclic communication ................... 3-5

DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 3-31

DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication

Functions ........................................ 3-3

Message Communication ........... 3-21

Objects and Services .................. 3-25

Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 3-27

Overview of Communication

Methods .......................................... 3-3

Reading the DL Object Table .... 3-30

Usable Connections ...................... 3-7

Using DL Object .......................... 3-46

What can Cyclic Communication

do? .................................................. 3-6

What can Message Communication

do? ................................................ 3-22

What is EtherNet/IP? ...................... 3-2

GT-70A Series

Assignment to IN Area

(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 4-8

Assignment to OUT Area

(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 4-15

Basic Format and Processing Flow

of Message Communication ...... 4-28

Checking the Device

Compatibility ................................ 4-20

Communication Methods ............ 4-17

Page 354: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

9-7 Index

9

Ap

pe

nd

ix

Configuring Cyclic

Communication .............................. 4-6

Configuring Message

Communication ............................ 4-22

Cyclic communication .................. 4-5

DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 4-31

DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication

Functions ........................................ 4-3

Message Communication ........... 4-21

Objects and Services ................. 4-25

Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 4-27

Overview of Communication

Methods .......................................... 4-3

Reading the DL Object Table .... 4-30

Usable Connections ...................... 4-7

Using DL Object .......................... 4-45

What can Cyclic Communication

do? .................................................. 4-6

What can Message Communication

do? ................................................ 4-22

What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 4-2

I

IB Series

Assignment to IN Area

(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 6-8

Assignment to OUT Area

(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 6-16

Basic Format and Processing Flow

of Message Communication ...... 6-29

Checking the Device

Compatibility ................................ 6-21

Communication Methods ........... 6-18

Configuring Cyclic

Communication .............................. 6-6

Configuring Message

Communication ............................ 6-23

Cyclic communication .................. 6-5

DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 6-32

DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication

Functions ........................................ 6-3

Message Communication ........... 6-22

Objects and Services ................. 6-26

Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 6-28

Overview of Communication

Methods .......................................... 6-3

Reading the DL Object Table .... 6-31

Usable Connections ...................... 6-7

Using DL Object .......................... 6-53

What can Cyclic Communication

do? .................................................. 6-6

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network U

What can Message Communication

do? ................................................ 6-23

What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 6-2

IG Series

Assignment to IN Area

(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 5-8

Assignment to OUT Area

(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 5-15

Basic Format and Processing Flow

of Message Communication ...... 5-28

Checking the Device

Compatibility ................................ 5-20

Communication Methods ........... 5-17

Configuring Cyclic

Communication ............................. 5-6

Configuring Message

Communication ........................... 5-22

Cyclic communication .................. 5-5

DL Object (Class ID:67H) .......... 5-31

DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication

Functions ........................................ 5-3

Message Communication .......... 5-21

Objects and Services ................. 5-25

Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 5-27

Overview of Communication

Methods ......................................... 5-3

Reading the DL Object Table .... 5-30

Usable Connections ..................... 5-7

Using DL Object .......................... 5-52

What can Cyclic Communication

do? .................................................. 5-6

What can Message Communication

do? ................................................ 5-22

What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 5-2

Installation and Connection to Sensor

Amplifiers ................................................ 2-3

Assigning ID Numbers ................. 2-6

Mounting and connection to Sensor

Amplifiers ....................................... 2-3

N

Names and Functions of Each Part ..... 1-4

O

Objects usable by DL-EP1

Assembly Object (class ID: 04H) 9-26

Connection Manager Object

(class ID: 06H) ............................. 9-28

Ethernet Link Object

(class ID: F6H) ............................. 9-34

nit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9-40

Page 355: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

9-7Index

9

9A

pp

en

dix

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Netwo

Identity Object (class ID: 01H) ... 9-22

List of Usable Objects ................. 9-20

Message Router Object

(class ID: 02H) ............................. 9-25

Reading Each Object Table ....... 9-21

TCP/IP Interface Object

(class ID: F5H) ............................. 9-30

P

Procedures for Communicating with

an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ...... 9-9

Procedures for Communication

with an Allen-Bradley

SLC5/05 PLC ................................ 9-15

Procedures from Installation before

Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration ...... 2-2

Configuration Procedures ............. 2-2

S

Specifications ......................................... 8-2

T

Troubleshooting ...................................... 9-6

W

Wiring ..................................................... 2-10

Connecting a communication

cable ............................................. 2-10

-41

rk Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
Page 356: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -

Revision History

Print date Revision no. Description

March, 2011 Initial release

Page 357: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.

(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.

(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.

(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS A FFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.

BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1110-2

Page 358: DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1

Copyright (c) 2011 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved.96140E 1031-1 96140E Printed in Japan


Recommended